1. 《贪经》的注释巴利
1. Lobhasuttavaṇṇanā
1 现在,到了注释世尊以“诸比丘,应当断除一法”等语句所安立的经典的时候了。不过,这部义注要先考察经典的安立方式,讲起来才清楚,所以我们先来考察经典的安立。经典的安立有四种:自意、他意、依问、因事。就像无数成百上千种经典,虽然种类繁多,但都不超出依杂染分等安立方式而来的十六种分类;同样,它们也都不超出以自意等经典安立方式而来的四种分类。其中,自意和因事,与他意、依问之间可以存在关联和区别,也就是自意与他意、自意与依问、因事与他意、因事与依问,这是因为意乐和提问之间可以有关联。同样,因事与自意之间虽然也可以有关联和区别,但由于自意等已经先在那里,因事与它们并无关联,所以并不是一种毫无遗漏的安立方式。或者也可以这样理解:因为可能存在的其余安立方式都包含在这四种之中,所以以根本安立为准,说经典有四种安立。巴利
1. Idāni ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahathātiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā atthavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāressāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti. Yathā hi anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhataṃ nātivattantīti. Tattha yathā attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāvasikehi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko cāti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisambhavato; evaṃ yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā attajjhāsayenapi saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati, attajjhāsayādīhi pana purato ṭhitehi aṭṭhuppattiyā saṃsaggo natthīti niravaseso paṭṭhānanayo na sambhavati. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattāro suttanikkhepā vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
这里要解释一下这些词的词义。“安立”就是被放置、被安立的意思;经本身就是安立,所以叫“经安立”。或者说,安立这个动作就是“安立”,经的安立就是“经安立”,意思就是经的教导。自己的意乐叫“自意”,它是其原因,所以叫“自意”;或者说,自己的意乐就是它的原因,所以叫“自意”。他意也是同样的道理。依于提问,叫“依问”;提问是它的原因,所以叫“依问”。作为经教基础的事的生起,就是“事起”;“事起”就是“因事”,把 tha 音变成 ṭha 音;它有这个原因,所以叫“因事”。或者,通过这些来安立经,所以叫“安立”,也就是自意等本身。不过在词义分别中,自己的意乐是“自意”,他人的意乐是“他意”。被提问的叫“问”,也就是应当被问的意思;依提问而生起的、接受法义者的说法叫“依问语”,依“安立”一词,按阳性而说为“依问”。同样,“事起”就是“因事”,这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipīyatīti nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Atha vā nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo, attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vasoti pucchāvaso. So etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti , atthuppatti eva aṭṭhuppatti tha-kārassa ṭha-kāraṃ katvā, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti nikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho, pucchāvasena pavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pucchāvasikoti pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhuppatti eva aṭṭhuppattikoti evamettha attho veditabbo.
另外,因为不依赖他人根器成熟等条件,所以把“自意”单独列为一种经的安立方式是合理的,因为这类教导只是依着世尊自己的意乐而说,目的是让法住立。可是,他意和依问是以他人的意乐和提问作为说法的生起因,当它们生起时,为什么不能归在因事里呢?或者说,依问和因事是随他意而生起的,为什么不能归在他意里呢?不应该这样质疑。因为除了他人的志向、反复询问等之外,只有以经的教说之因的生起为特征的情况,才被当作因事,所以“他意”和“依问”才被单独列出。就像《梵网经》《法嗣经》等,以称赞、贬毁、利养等事的生起作为说法的缘,这称为因事。不因他人提问,只以意乐为缘而说的,是他意;依提问之力而说的,是依问。这个道理很清楚。巴利
Apica paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto, kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (dī. na. 1.1 ādayo) vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ aṭṭhuppatti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
世尊不等人请求,只凭自己的意乐而说的那些经,比如《希求经》《迅速经》等,这些经的安立就是“依自意”。巴利
Yāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti, seyyathidaṃ – ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, tuvaṭṭakasuttantievamādīni (su. ni. 921 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.64 ādayo), tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
还有一类,是观察了他人的意乐、信忍、志向和觉悟程度之后,依照他人的意乐而说的法,比如《教诫罗睺罗经》《转法轮经》等。就像观察到“罗睺罗的解脱成熟之法已经圆满,我现在应当进一步引导罗睺罗断尽诸漏”而说的经典。这些法的安立方式,就是依他人意乐。巴利
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca oloketvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – rāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanasuttantievamādīni (ma. ni. 2.107 ādayo; 3.416 ādayo; saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 19-20), tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
不过,当天人和人、四众以及四种姓的人来到世尊面前,用各种方式提问,比如“尊者,常听说觉支、觉支,又听说盖、盖……”时,世尊针对这些提问所说的《觉支相应》等法,把它们按提问来归类整理,就是“依问安立”。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā devā manussā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā ca tathā tathā pañhaṃ pucchanti ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgāti, bhante, vuccanti, nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇāti vuccantī’’tiādinā , evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni (saṃ. ni. 5.186) tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
不过,那些是依据已生起的因缘而说的,比如《法嗣经》《子肉喻经》《木段喻经》等,对它们来说,安立方式则是依事而设。巴利
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ, puttamaṃsūpamaṃ, dārukkhandhūpamantievamādīni (ma. ni. 1.29; saṃ. ni. 2.63), tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
这样,在这四种经的安立方式中,这部经的安立属于“他人的意乐”。因为它是依据他人的意乐而安立的。依据谁的意乐呢?依据那些见到贪欲过患的人的意乐。不过,有些人说这是“自己的意乐”。巴利
Evamimesu catūsu suttanikkhepesu imassa suttassa parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Parajjhāsayavasena hetaṃ nikkhittaṃ. Kesaṃ ajjhāsayena? Lobhe ādīnavadassīnaṃ puggalānaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘attajjhāsayo’’ti vadanti.
在这里,“比丘们,一法”等说法中,“一”这个词,有时候是“某些”的意思,比如“有些沙门婆罗门宣称:‘我与世间是常恒的,只有这才是真实的,其他都是虚妄的’”(中部3.27)。有时候是“殊胜”的意思,比如“心的专一状态”(长部1.228;波罗夷11)。有时候是“没有同伴”的意思,比如“独自远离而住”(长部1.405)。有时候是“计数”的意思,比如“比丘们,只有一个刹那、一个时机适合修梵行”(增支部8.29)。在这里,也应当理解为“计数”的意思。巴利
Tattha ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhavetiādīsu ekasaddo attheva aññatthe ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27). Atthi seṭṭhe ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228; pārā. 11). Atthi asahāye ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405). Atthi saṅkhāyaṃ ‘‘ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29). Idhāpi saṅkhāyameva daṭṭhabbo.
“法”这个词,出现在教理、谛、定、慧、本性、福、罪、空性、所知、自性等含义中。比如在“在这里,比丘学法”(增支部5.73)这类句子里,意思是教理。在“现见法”(长部1.299)这类句子里,意思是谛。在“那些世尊有如此法”(长部2.13;3.142)这类句子里,意思是定。在“真实、法、坚忍、布施,死后不忧愁”(本生经1.1.57)这类句子里,意思是慧。在“比丘们,有生法的众生,生起这样的欲望”(长部2.398)这类句子里,意思是本性。在“法确实保护行法者”(本生经1.10.102)这类句子里,意思是福。在“应以三法中的某一法来说,或以波罗夷,或以僧残,或以波逸提”(波罗夷444)这类句子里,意思是罪。在“在那个时刻,诸法存在”(法集论121)这类句子里,意思是空性。在“一切法以一切方式,出现在佛陀世尊的智门之前”(大义释156;小义释·莫伽罗阇童子问义释85)这类句子里,意思是所知。在“善法、不善法”(法集论·三法论母1)这类句子里,意思是自性。在这里,也是指自性。所以“一法”是指一种杂染的自性,这是它的意趣所在。它既是一,又是法,所以叫“一法”;这就是那一法。巴利
Dhamma-saddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattisuññatāñeyyasabhāvādīsu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyatti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299) saccāni. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; 3.142) samādhi. ‘‘Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, save pecca na socatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) paññā. ‘‘Jātidhammānaṃ, bhikkhave, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.398) pakati. ‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102) puññaṃ. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ aññatarena vadeyya pārājikena vā saṅghādisesena vā pācittiyena vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 444) āpatti. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) suññatā. ‘‘Sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) ñeyyo. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sabhāvo attho . Idhāpi sabhāvo. Tasmā ekadhammanti ekaṃ saṃkilesasabhāvanti adhippāyo. Eko ca so dhammo cāti ekadhammo, taṃ ekadhammaṃ.
“比丘们”是在呼唤比丘们。那么,世尊在说法时,为什么要呼唤比丘们,而不只是说法呢?是为了让他们生起正念。因为比丘们坐着的时候,有的在想别的事,有的在省察法,有的在作意业处。如果不先叫他们一声就直接说法,他们就无法好好判断:“这个开示是以什么为根据、以什么为条件而说的?”但如果先叫了他们,他们就能提起正念,好好判断。所以,为了让他们生起正念,才呼唤“比丘们”。而且,通过这个由乞食等功德所成就的称呼,世尊揭示了一种远离卑劣之人和骄慢之人的生活方式,从而调伏了掉举和昏沉的心。通过“比丘们”这个以慈悲遍满、柔和之心和目光为先导的称呼,世尊让他们面向自己;又通过这个表明想要说法的称呼,让他们生起想听的欲望。也正是通过这个呼唤的含义,世尊促使他们好好听闻和作意。因为教法的成就,就取决于好好听闻和作意。巴利
Bhikkhaveti bhikkhū ālapati. Kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento bhikkhū ālapati, na dhammameva desetīti? Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū hi aññaṃ cintentāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karontāpi nisinnā honti. Te paṭhamaṃ anālapitvā dhamme desiyamāne ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kiṃnidānā, kiṃpaccayā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ na sakkonti. Ālapite pana satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā sallakkhetuṃ sakkonti, tasmā satijananatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti ālapati. Tena ca tesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhikkhave’’ti iminā karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano mukhābhimukhe karonto tena ca kathetukamyatādīpakena vacanena nesaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti. Teneva ca sambodhanatthena sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārepi niyojeti. Sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
当天众和人众等会众成员也在场时,为什么只称呼比丘们呢?因为比丘们最为资深、最为殊胜、最为亲近、常随侍在世尊身边。世尊的说法是面向一切会众的,而在会众当中,比丘们最为资深,因为他们是最先被度化的;最为殊胜,因为他们以非还果位为起点,跟随导师修行,并且领受整个教法;最为亲近,因为在座众人中他们就在附近;常随侍,因为他们常在导师身边。再者,他们是说法的容器,因为他们能按照教导去修行,而且这番开示是特别针对某些比丘说的,所以只称呼他们。巴利
Aññesupi devamanussesu parisapariyāpannesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhū eva āmantesīti? Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā, parisāya ca jeṭṭhā bhikkhū paṭhamuppannattā, seṭṭhā anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthu cariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca, āsannā tattha nisinnesu samīpavuttiyā, sadāsannihitā satthusantikāvacarattā. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato, visesato ca ekacce bhikkhū sandhāya ayaṃ desanāti te eva ālapi.
“应当断除”:在这里,“断”一共有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断。其中,就像用灯光驱除黑暗一样,因为灯光正好是黑暗的对治,所以用无贪等来断除贪等,用名色分别等观智来断除种种不利之法,这就是彼分断。具体来说:用布施断除贪等污垢,用戒断除杀生等坏戒行,用信等断除无信等,用名色确定断除身见,用缘摄受断除无因见和邪因见;然后,用度疑清净断除犹豫不定,用对诸行聚的思惟断除“我、我所”的执取,用道非道智见清净断除把非道当成道的想法,用生随观断除断灭见,用灭随观断除常见,用怖畏随观断除在可怕事物上生起的不可怕想,用过患随观断除享乐想,用厌离随观断除欢喜想,用欲解脱智断除不想解脱的状态,用行舍智断除不中舍的状态,用随顺智断除对法住性的执著,用涅槃断除相违之态,用种姓智断除对诸行相的执取——这些就叫作彼分断。巴利
Pajahathāti ettha pahānaṃ nāma tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha yaṃ dīpālokeneva tamassa paṭipakkhabhāvato alobhādīhi lobhādikassa, nāmarūpaparicchedādivipassanāñāṇehi tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – pariccāgena lobhādimalassa, sīlena pāṇātipātādidussīlyassa, saddhādīhi assaddhiyādikassa, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhayesu abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanena abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyā, nibbānena paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma.
通过近行定与安止定之分,以定力阻止烦恼现行与增长,就像用陶锤打散水面上的浮苔一样,断除那些盖障等法,这叫作镇伏断。依靠修习四种圣道,在各自相续中,依照“为断诸见”等经文所说的方法,将属于集谛一方的烦恼聚彻底斩断,使其永远不再生起,这叫作截断断。在果位刹那,烦恼归于止息,这叫作止息断。因为出离一切有为法,一切有为法悉皆断尽,这就是涅槃,叫作出离断。在这五种断中,此处指的是能成就不来果的那种断,所以应当知道这里说的是截断断。因此,“应断”的意思是:应舍弃,应截断。巴利
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena samucchindanaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Evaṃ pañcavidhe pahāne anāgāmikabhāvakarassa pahānassa adhippetattā idha samucchedappahānanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā pajahathāti pariccajatha, samucchindathāti attho.
“我”是世尊用来指自己。“vo”这个字,出现在表示主格、宾格、具格、属格、补足词和与格的地方。比如“阿那律,你们是否和合、欢喜?”(《中部》1.326)里,它是主格的意思。“诸比丘,去吧,我遣散你们。”(《中部》2.157)里,是宾格的意思。“你们不应住在我跟前。”(《中部》2.157)里,是具格的意思。“舍利弗,你们所说的都是善说。”(《中部》1.345)里,是属格的意思。“那些圣者,他们清净的身业。”(《中部》1.35)里,是补足词的意思。“诸比丘,我要为你们讲说林野分际的法门。”(《中部》1.190)里,是与格的意思。这里也应该看作与格。巴利
Ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Voti ayaṃ vosaddo paccattaupayogakaraṇasāmivacanapadapūraṇasampadānesu dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘kacci, pana vo anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326) paccatte āgato. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. Idhāpi sampadāne eva daṭṭhabbo.
“保证者”就是担保人。因为他对持有者来说,是债务人的代表;对债务人来说,又是持有者的代表;他作为债务人财物的代表,通过取用等方式享用,所以叫“享用者”,也就是“保证者”,巴利语是pāṭibhogo。“为不来者性”,是指为了达到不来者的状态。因为不再以结生的方式回到欲有,所以叫不来者。通过证得某一法而被称为不来者的有果第三道,就叫不来者性。就这样,世尊善于调御可教化的人,随顺他们的心意,用简要的方法,仅仅通过圆满一法,就稳固地展示了第三道的证得,这正是正自觉者的做法。因为第三道所断的嗔恚等结缚烦恼,即使层次不同,也都超不出对欲贪的断除。巴利
Pāṭibhogoti paṭibhū. So hi dhāraṇakaṃ paṭicca dhanikassa, dhanikaṃ paṭicca dhāraṇakassa paṭinidhibhūto dhanikasantakassa tato haraṇādisaṅkhātena bhuñjanena bhogoti paṭibhogo, paṭibhogo eva pāṭibhogo. Anāgāmitāyāti anāgāmibhāvatthāya. Paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena hi kāmabhavassa anāgamanato anāgāmī. Yo yassa dhammassa adhigamena anāgāmīti vuccati, saphalo so tatiyamaggo anāgāmitā nāma. Iti bhagavā veneyyadamanakusalo veneyyajjhāsayānukūlaṃ tatiyamaggādhigamaṃ lahunā upāyena ekadhammapūraṇatāmattena thiraṃ katvā dassesi yathā taṃ sammāsambuddho. Bhinnabhūmikāpi hi paṭighasaṃyojanādayo tatiyamaggavajjhā kilesā kāmarāgappahānaṃ nātivattantīti.
那么,世尊为什么在这里把自己摆到担保人的位置上呢?是为了让那些比丘生起精进心,去证得不来道。因为世尊看到:当他说出“比丘们,你们要舍弃一法,我给你们担保能证得不来果”之后,这些比丘一定会想:“法主既然先说了‘我来担保’,那只要舍弃那一法,就一定能证得第三地。所以应当为此努力修行。”这样一来,他们就会生起精进心。因此,为了激发那些比丘证得不来果的精进心,世尊才把自己摆到担保人的位置上。巴利
Kasmā panettha bhagavā attānaṃ pāṭibhogabhāve ṭhapesi? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāgāmimaggādhigamāya ussāhajananatthaṃ. Passati hi bhagavā ‘‘mayā ‘ekadhammaṃ, bhikkhave, pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’ti vutte ime bhikkhū addhā taṃ ekadhammaṃ pahāya sakkā tatiyabhūmiṃ samadhigantuṃ, yato dhammassāmi paṭhamamāha ‘ahaṃ pāṭibhogo’ti ussāhajātā tadatthāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti. Tasmā ussāhajananatthaṃ anāgāmitāya tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ attānaṃ pāṭibhogabhāve ṭhapesi.
“哪一法”在这里是提问的说法。而提问一共有五种:未见而求说明的提问、已见而求核对的提问、为断除疑惑的提问、为获得认可的提问、想说法的提问。
其中,当某个特征本来还不被知道、没被见过、没被衡量过、没被审察过、不清楚、没被阐明,为了知道它、看见它、衡量它、审察它、让它清楚、把它阐明而提问,这就是未见而求说明的提问。
当某个特征本来已经被知道、被见过、被衡量过、被审察过、清楚、已被阐明,为了和其他智者一起核对讨论而提问,这就是已见而求核对的提问。
当对某个特征陷入疑惑、犹豫,变成两难——“是这样吗?不是这样吗?是什么?怎么回事?”——为了断除疑惑而提问,这就是为断除疑惑的提问。
世尊为了让人认可接受而提问,比如“比丘们,你们认为怎样?色是常还是无常?”等等,这就是为获得认可的提问。
世尊因为想说而对比丘们提问,比如“比丘们,有四种食,能让已生的众生安住,也能帮助那些寻求再生的众生。是哪四种呢?”这就是想说法的提问。巴利
Katamaṃ ekadhammanti ettha katamanti pucchāvacanaṃ. Pucchā ca nāmesā pañcavidhā – adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā , kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tattha pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtatthāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā. Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. So aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā. Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto – ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā. Bhagavā hi anumatiggahaṇatthaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 21), ayaṃ anumatipucchā. Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā.
在这里,前三种提问是诸佛没有的。为什么呢?因为在三时之中,没有任何有为法或超越三时的无为法,是正自觉者未曾见、未曾衡量、未曾审察、未曾显现、未曾明了的。因此,他们没有“未见解明”的提问。而他们以自身智慧所通达的法,不需要再与其他沙门、婆罗门、天、魔或梵天一起核对比较,因此他们也没有“已见合勘”的提问。又因为诸佛世尊没有疑惑,已经超越疑惑,对一切法都没有犹豫,所以他们也没有“断疑”的提问。另外两种提问则是存在的,其中这一种应当知道是“欲说法提问”。巴利
Tattha purimā tisso pucchā buddhānaṃ natthi. Kasmā? Tīsu hi addhāsu kiñci saṅkhataṃ addhāvimuttaṃ vā asaṅkhataṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ nāma natthi. Tena nesaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā natthi. Yaṃ pana tehi attano ñāṇena paṭividdhaṃ, tassa aññena samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā saddhiṃ saṃsandanakiccaṃ natthi, tena nesaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchāpi natthi. Yasmā pana buddhā bhagavanto akathaṃkathī tiṇṇavicikicchā sabbadhammesu vigatasaṃsayā, tena nesaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchāpi natthi. Itarā pana dve pucchā atthi, tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti veditabbā.
现在,为了具体说明那个提问所问的含义,世尊说:“比丘们,贪是一法。”其中,众生因为贪而染著,或者它本身就染著,或者它只是染著本身,所以叫“贪”。这个贪以执取所缘为特征,就像粘胶;以黏著为作用,就像肉片掉进热锅;以不肯舍弃为表现,就像油和眼药之染色;以在可被结缚的事物中看到乐味为直接原因。它不断增长,成为渴爱之流;应当知道,它在哪里生起,就像急流之河把众生带向大海一样,贪也只会把那个众生带向恶趣。虽然“贪”这个词是泛指一切贪,但这里应当知道它特指欲贪,因为欲贪正是被不来道所断除的。巴利
Idāni tāya pucchāya puṭṭhamatthaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti lobho. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇo makkaṭālepo viya, abhisaṅgaraso tattakapāle pakkhittamaṃsapesi viya, apariccāgapaccupaṭṭhāno telañjanarāgo viya, saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanapadaṭṭhāno, taṇhānadibhāvena vaḍḍhamāno yattha samuppanno, sīghasotā nadī viya mahāsamuddaṃ apāyameva taṃ sattaṃ gahetvā gacchatīti daṭṭhabbo. Kiñcāpi ayaṃ lobhasaddo sabbalobhasāmaññavacano, idha pana kāmarāgavacanoti veditabbo. So hi anāgāmimaggavajjho.
再者,“比丘们”这个称呼,是为了让那些以领受法的心态面对法的人,对法生起恭敬。通过“应断除”这句话,说明了断的现观;而这种断的现观,是跟遍知的现观、证悟的现观、修习的现观一起运作的,不是单独生起的。这样一来,依四谛而立的四种正见作用就都包含在内了。就像说“应断除贪”时,因为贪属于应断除的范畴,所以嗔等其他烦恼的断除在意义上也一并被说到了;同样,当说到在集谛范围内正见的作用即断的现观时,作为它助伴的正思惟等其他道支,它们在集谛上的作用在意义上也一并被说到了。因此应当知道,这里已经完整地说明了圣道的作用。按照这个道理,念处等菩提分法的作用在这里被说到的情形,也应当根据情况详细展开。巴利
Puna bhikkhaveti ālapanaṃ dhammassa paṭiggāhakabhāvena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ tattha ādarajananatthaṃ. Pajahathāti iminā pahānābhisamayo vihito, so ca pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayehi saddhiṃ eva pavattati, na visunti catusaccādhiṭṭhānāni cattāripi sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccāni vihitāneva honti. Yathā ca ‘‘lobhaṃ pajahathā’’ti vutte pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato dosādīnampi pahānaṃ atthato vuttameva hoti, evaṃ samudayasaccavisaye sammādiṭṭhikicce pahānābhisamaye vutte tassā sahakārīkāraṇabhūtānaṃ sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ sesamaggaṅgānampi samudayasaccavisayakiccaṃ atthato vuttameva hotīti paripuṇṇo ariyamaggabyāpāro idha kathitoti daṭṭhabbo. Iminā nayena satipaṭṭhānādīnampi bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ byāpārassa idha vuttabhāvo yathārahaṃ vitthāretabbo.
另外,这里说“要断除贪”,这句话讲的是断遍知。而断遍知以审察遍知为基础,审察遍知又以知遍知为基础;因为这三者互相离不开,所以三种遍知就都被点明了。应当这样理解:在这里,连同果一起,已经完整地开示了四谛的修行法门。另一种说法是,“要断除贪”这句话连同果一起,讲的是如实知见清净。而如实知见清净又依赖行道知见清净……依赖心清净和戒清净。应当知道,按照这种前后紧密相连的关系,连同果一起,七种清净就全都说明白了。巴利
Apicettha lobhaṃ pajahathāti etena pahānapariññā vuttā. Sā ca tīraṇapariññādhiṭṭhānā, tīraṇapariññā ca ñātapariññādhiṭṭhānāti avinābhāvena tissopi pariññā bodhitā honti. Evamettha saha phalena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā pakāsitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā lobhaṃ pajahathāti saha phalena ñāṇadassanavisuddhi desitā. Sā ca paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisannissayā…pe… cittavisuddhisīlavisuddhisannissayā cāti nānantarikabhāvena saha phalena sabbāpi satta visuddhiyo vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
一个想要断除贪的人,依靠这种以清净次第来修习的方式,通过完成三种遍知——巴利
Evametāya visuddhikkamabhāvanāya pariññāttayasampādanena lobhaṃ pajahitukāmena –
贪欲会带来无益,贪欲会搅乱内心;
恐惧从自己内心生起,人们却察觉不到。
贪心的人不懂真正的利益,贪心的人看不见法。
那时,人就被贪欲彻底吞没,陷入一片漆黑。巴利
‘‘Anatthajanano lobho, lobho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhati. ‘‘Luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ’’. (itivu. 88);
贤友,一个被贪欲染着的人,被贪欲征服、内心被贪欲彻底控制,他会杀生,会偷盗,会破门入户,会抢劫财物,会洗劫孤户,会拦路打劫,会与人妻私通,也会说妄语。而那些沙门、婆罗门对此不知道、看不见、不觉察,追随渴爱,他们那样也不过是惶恐挣扎而已。巴利
Ratto kho, āvuso, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto pāṇampi hanati, adinnampi ādiyati, sandhimpi chindati, nillopampi harati, ekāgārikampi karoti, paripanthepi tiṭṭhati, paradārampi gacchati, musāpi bhaṇati. Tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ avedayataṃ taṇhānugatānaṃ paritassitaṃ vipphanditameva (a. ni. 3.54).
以渴爱为伴侣的人,在漫长的轮回中流转;
他不能超越这种存在状态和那种存在状态,不能超越轮回。
没有比贪欲更烈的火,没有比嗔恨更重的灾祸。
我被欲望的贪爱烧着,我的心也被烧得焦灼。
那些被贪欲染着的人奔向欲流,就像猴子奔向自己织的网一样。巴利
‘‘Taṇhādutiyo puriso, dīghamaddhāna saṃsaraṃ; Itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ, saṃsāraṃ nātivattati’’. (itivu. 15, 105); ‘‘Natthi rāgasamo aggi, natthi dosasamo kali’’. (dha. pa. 202, 251); ‘‘Kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi, cittaṃ me pariḍayhati’’. (saṃ. ni. 1.212); ‘‘Ye rāgarattānupatanti sotaṃ, sayaṃkataṃ makkaṭakova jāla’’nti. (dha. pa. 347) ca –
依照如是等经句,用各种方法观察贪欲的过患之后,应当为了断除它而修行。巴利
Evamādisuttapadānusārena nānānayehi lobhassa ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā tassa pahānāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
另外,有六种法能帮助断除欲贪:取不净相、致力于修不净观、守护根门、饮食知量、亲近善友、说适当的话。因为,取十种不净相的人,欲贪也能被断除;以身至念的修习,对有知觉的身体修不净,对无知觉的尸体以膨胀等相致力于修不净观的人,欲贪也能被断除;在以意为第六的诸根上,以防护、以正念的门闩关住根门的人,欲贪也能被断除;在还剩四五口食物时便喝水、以这样的方式维持生命为习惯、饮食知量的人,欲贪也能被断除。因此说——巴利
Apica cha dhammā kāmarāgassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmarāgo pahīyati, kāyagatāsatibhāvanāvasena saviññāṇake uddhumātakādivasena aviññāṇake asubhe asubhabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassāpi, manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu saṃvaraṇavasena satikavāṭena pihitadvārassāpi , catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tenevāha –
还剩四五口饭团不吃,就喝水;
对精进努力的比丘来说,这足以让他安稳而住。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
即使亲近乐于修习不净业处的善知识,在站立、坐下等时候谈论与十种不净相关的适当话题,也能断除爱欲。因此他说:巴利
Asubhakammaṭṭhānabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tenevāha –
比丘们,存在不净相,在那里反复如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的欲贪不生起、让已经生起的欲贪断除的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa pahānāyā’’ti.
在修行前期,为了断除被称为欲贪的贪,修行者努力修观,然后以第三道将它彻底断尽,毫无剩余。因此说:“比丘们,要断除贪这一法,我为你们担保:你们将证得不还果。”巴利
Evaṃ pubbabhāge kāmarāgasaṅkhātassa lobhassa pahānāya paṭipanno vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena taṃ anavasesato samucchindati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lobhaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahatha, ahaṃ vo pāṭibhogo anāgāmitāyā’’ti.
这里有人问:那么,这里被断除的贪是什么?是过去的、未来的,还是现在的?对此应该怎么理解呢?首先,过去的贪不可能被断除,未来的贪也不可能被断除,因为它们都不存在。因为已经灭去的和还没有生起的,都不能说是有;如果那样的话,努力修行就变得没有意义了。如果是现在的贪,同样努力也没有意义,因为现在的贪其自性就是刹那即灭;而且这样一来,道的发展就变成了杂染的,或者贪就变成了与心不相应,但这种说法并不合理。因此,并不是按照上面说的方式断除过去、未来或现在的贪。就好比这里有一棵幼树,还没有长出果实,有人用斧头从根上把它砍断。树被砍断之后,原本应该由这棵树结出的果实,因为树已被砍断,还没有生起就不再出生了。同样地,在证得圣道时,本来会生起的贪,由于证得圣道而摧毁了它的条件,所以不再生起。这在注疏中被称为得地而生。因为在修观时,作为所缘的五蕴是它生起的地方,所以称为地。那个地已经被它获得,因此称为得地而生。也正是这个,被称为所缘已执取而生、未镇伏而生、未断尽而生。巴利
Etthāha ‘‘ko panettha lobho pahīyati, kiṃ atīto, atha anāgato, udāhu paccuppanno’’ti? Kiñcettha – na tāva atīto lobho pahīyeyya, na anāgato vā tesaṃ abhāvato. Na hi niruddhaṃ anuppannaṃ vā atthīti vuccati, vāyāmo ca aphalo āpajjati. Atha paccuppanno, evampi aphalo vāyāmo tassa sarasabhaṅgattā, saṃkiliṭṭhā ca maggabhāvanā āpajjati, cittavippayutto vā lobho siyā, na cāyaṃ nayo icchitoti. Vuccate – na vuttanayena atītānāgatapaccuppanno lobho pahīyati. Seyyathāpi idha taruṇarukkho asañjātaphalo, taṃ puriso kuṭhāriyā mūle chindeyya, tassa rukkhassa chede asati yāni phalāni nibbatteyyuṃ, tāni rukkhassa chinnattā ajātāni eva na jāyeyyuṃ, evameva ariyamaggādhigame asati uppajjanāraho lobho ariyamaggādhigamena paccayaghātassa katattā na uppajjati. Ayañhi aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘bhūmiladdhuppanno’’ti vuccati. Vipassanāya hi ārammaṇabhūtā pañcakkhandhā tassa uppajjanaṭṭhānatāya bhūmi nāma. Sā bhūmi tena laddhāti katvā bhūmiladdhuppanno. Ārammaṇādhiggahituppanno avikkhambhituppanno asamūhatuppannoti ca ayameva vuccati.
这里说的“于此”,是指在那部经里。“此”是指这个已经讲明的义理。现在要按偈颂的形式来说。“此说”——那是谁说的呢?正是世尊说的。因为在其他类似的地方,是结集者所作的结集偈颂,但在这里,是世尊为了那些喜欢偈颂的人,随顺他们的意乐,把已经说过的义理归纳起来,说出了偈颂。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ sutte. Etanti etaṃ atthajātaṃ. Idāni gāthābandhavasena vuccamānaṃ. Iti vuccatīti kena pana vuccati? Bhagavatā va. Aññesu hi tādisesu ṭhānesu saṅgītikārehi upanibandhagāthā honti, idha pana bhagavatā va gāthārucikānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttamevatthaṃ saṅgahetvā gāthā bhāsitā.
在这里,由于那种贪——以执取所缘为特征、以染著为作用——众生被贪所染,对内在和外在的诸处贪求、执著,所以说“因何贪而贪婪,有情去恶趣”。“贪婪”中的 se 只是一个语尾虚词。不过文法家认为,在这类地方应该加上 se 这个音节。正因为这样被贪所染,他们不做身善行等任何善行,反而积累身恶行等,这些被称为“有情”的众生,因为黏著于色等对象,就以结生的方式投生到地狱、畜生界、饿鬼界——这些因为是一切苦生起之处,所以被称为“恶趣”。巴利
Tattha yena lobhena luddhāse, sattā gacchanti duggatinti yena ārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇena tato eva abhisaṅgarasena lobhena luddhā ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu giddhā gadhitā. Seti hi nipātamattaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana īdisesu ṭhānesu se-kārāgamaṃ icchanti. Tathā luddhattā eva kāyasucaritādīsu kiñci sucaritaṃ akatvā kāyaduccaritādīni ca upacinitvā rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya sattāti laddhanāmā pāṇino dukkhassa nibbattiṭṭhānatāya duggatīti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ nirayaṃ tiracchānayoniṃ pettivisayañca paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena gacchanti upapajjanti.
他们以正智如实了知那贪之后,就以观者的身份断除它。也就是说,对于前面所说的贪,从它的自性、生起、灭尽、滋味、过患、出离这些方面,以正确而不颠倒的原因和方法,用称为“了知、审察、遍知”的智慧去认知;然后对色等五取蕴,以无常等各种方式去观照,因此称为“观者”。他们以观慧为先导,用道慧将那贪彻底断除,使它不再在自己的相续中生起。断除之后,就不再回到这个世间。像这样,连同残余的烦恼一起,以不来道断除那贪之后,由于下分结已被彻底断尽,就不再以结生的方式回到这个名为欲界的世间。于是,世尊以不来果结束了这次说法。巴利
Taṃ lobhaṃ sammadaññāya, pajahanti vipassinoti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ lobhaṃ sabhāvato samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato nissaraṇatoti imehi ākārehi sammā aviparītaṃ hetunā ñāyena aññāya ñātatīraṇapariññāsaṅkhātāya paññāya jānitvā rūpādike pañcupādānakkhandhe aniccādīhi vividhehi ākārehi passanato vipassino avasiṭṭhakilese vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya samucchedappahānavasena pajahanti, na puna attano santāne uppajjituṃ denti. Pahāyana punāyanti, imaṃ lokaṃ kudācananti evaṃ sahajekaṭṭhapahānekaṭṭhehi avasiṭṭhakilesehi saddhiṃ taṃ lobhaṃ anāgāmimaggena pajahitvā puna pacchā imaṃ kāmadhātusaṅkhātaṃ lokaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena kadācipi na āgacchanti orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ suppahīnattā. Iti bhagavā anāgāmiphalena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
这个“义”也是指:从因缘(序分)的末尾开始,一直到偈颂结束,这部经所说明的义理。“亦”这个字,是对接下来将要宣说的诸经义理的总结。其余部分都和前面说的一样。在这部经里,集圣谛是以它自身的样貌直接出现的,道圣谛则是通过“断除”这一说法来说明。另外两个圣谛,则应当依据那两者是它们的因来确定。而在偈颂里,苦、集、道这三个圣谛按字面就能知道,另一个灭圣谛则应当加以确定。从这以后的诸经,也都是同样的方法。巴利
Ayampi atthoti nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva gāthāpariyosānā iminā suttena pakāsito attho. Api-saddo idāni vakkhamānasuttatthasampiṇḍano. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Imasmiṃ sutte samudayasaccaṃ sarūpeneva āgataṃ, pahānāpadesena maggasaccaṃ. Itaraṃ saccadvayañca tadubhayahetutāya niddhāretabbaṃ. Gāthāya pana dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni yathārutavaseneva ñāyanti, itaraṃ niddhāretabbaṃ. Eseva nayo ito paresupi suttesu.
2. 嗔经注释巴利
2. Dosasuttavaṇṇanā
2 2. 接着是《嗔经》的注释。这里先解释前面没有出现过的词。就像在这里一样,从这以后在所有地方,我们都只解释前面没出现过的词。因为这部经是世尊看到那些嗔心很重的人的根性之后,为了让他们平息嗔心才说的,所以经文里说“比丘们,你们要舍弃一法,就是嗔”。这里说的“嗔”,是指按照“他对我做了无益的事”这类方式(《分别论》960)在经中说的九种事,以及从相反的“他没有对我做有益的事”这类方式推出来的另外九种事,一共十八种愤恨生起的根据,再加上像残桩、荆棘这类不合理的情形,总共十九种愤恨事中,由其中任何一种生起的愤恨。它为什么叫“嗔”呢?因为众生借着它而恼怒,或者它自己就恼怒,或者它仅仅就是恼怒本身,所以叫“嗔”。它的特相是粗暴,像被激怒的毒蛇;它的作用是像毒液扩散一样蔓延,如同毒液发作;或者说它的作用是烧毁自己所依靠的地方,像森林大火;它的现起是恼怒,像得到机会的仇敌;它的近因就是前面说的那些愤恨事,应当看作像掺了毒的腐尿一样。舍弃,就是彻底断除。在这里,那些……巴利
2.Vuttañhetaṃ…pe… dosanti dutiyasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Yathā ettha, evaṃ ito paresupi sabbattha apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃyeva karissāma. Yasmā idaṃ suttaṃ dosabahulānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā dosavūpasamanatthaṃ desitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dosaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahathā’’ti āgataṃ. Tattha dosanti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarīti āghāto jāyatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 960) nayena sutte vuttānaṃ navannaṃ, ‘‘atthaṃ me nācarī’’tiādīnañca tappaṭipakkhato siddhānaṃ navannamevāti aṭṭhārasannaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādinā aṭṭhānena saddhiṃ ekūnavīsatiyā aññatarāghātavatthusambhavaṃ āghātaṃ. So hi dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti dosoti vuccati. So caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo pahaṭāsīviso viya, visappanaraso visanipāto viya, attano nissayadahanaraso vā dāvaggi viya, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno laddhokāso viya sapatto, yathāvuttaāghātavatthupadaṭṭhāno visasaṃsaṭṭhapūtimuttaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo. Pajahathāti samucchindatha. Tattha ye ime –
比丘们,有五种平息怨恨的方法,比丘心中生起的怨恨,应当通过这些方法彻底平息。是哪五种呢?比丘们,如果对某个人生起了怨恨,就应当对这个人修慈……修悲……修舍,对这个人采取不忆念、不作意的态度,这样就能平息对那个人的怨恨。比丘们,如果对某个人生起了怨恨,就应当对这个人确立“业是自己所有的”这一观念:“这位尊者是业的所有者,是业的继承者……将来也是如此。”巴利
‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, āghātapaṭivinayā, yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo. Katame pañca? Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, puggale āghāto jāyetha, mettā tasmiṃ puggale bhāvetabbā…pe… karuṇā…pe… upekkhā, asatiamanasikāro tasmiṃ puggale āpajjitabbo, evaṃ tasmiṃ puggale āghāto paṭivinetabbo. Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, puggale āghāto jāyetha, kammassakatā tasmiṃ puggale adhiṭṭhātabbā ‘kammassako ayamāyasmā kammadāyādo…pe… bhavissatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.161) –
以上就是所说的五种平息愤恨的方法。巴利
Evaṃ pañca āghātappaṭivinayā vuttāyeva.
贤友,有五种平息怨恨的方法,比丘一旦生起怨恨,就应当用这些方法彻底平息。是哪五种呢?贤友,这里有一种人,身体的行为不清净,但言语的行为清净;对这样的人,贤友,也应当平息怨恨。巴利
‘‘Pañcime, āvuso, āghātapaṭivinayā, yattha bhikkhuno uppanno āghāto sabbaso paṭivinetabbo. Katame pañca? Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo aparisuddhakāyasamācāro hoti parisuddhavacīsamācāro; evarūpepi, āvuso, puggale āghāto paṭivinetabbo’’ti (a. ni. 5.162) –
像这样一类方式,也宣说了五种平息怨恨的方法;用其中任何一种平息怨恨的方法来作观察之后。再者,那——巴利
Evamādināpi nayena pañca āghātapaṭivinayā vuttā, tesu yena kenaci āghātapaṭivinayavidhinā paccavekkhitvā. Apica yo –
比丘们,就算盗贼和暴徒用双柄锯把你们的肢体一节一节锯断,如果那时有人对此心生愤怒,他就不是在奉行我的教法。这是导师的教诫。巴利
‘‘Ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṃ, tatrāpi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.232) satthu ovādo.
对愤怒的人回以愤怒,那个人反而更糟糕。
面对愤怒的人自己不生气,就能打赢那场很难打赢的仗。
他兼顾两者的利益——自己的和别人的。
知道别人正在发怒,自己能保持正念,就能平静下来。巴利
‘‘Tasseva tena pāpiyo, yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati; Kuddhaṃ appaṭikujjhanto, saṅgāmaṃ jeti dujjayaṃ. ‘‘Ubhinnamatthaṃ carati, attano ca parassa ca; Paraṃ saṅkupitaṃ ñatvā, yo sato upasammati. (saṃ. ni. 1.188);
比丘们,有七种法会让怨敌如愿、让怨敌称心,它们会落到易怒的男人或女人身上。是哪七种呢?比丘们,在这里,怨敌对自己的仇人这样盼望:“但愿这个人长得丑!”这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为怨敌不会因为仇人长得好看而高兴。比丘们,一个易怒的人,被愤怒压倒、被愤怒控制,即使他好好洗澡、仔细涂香、修剪头发胡须、穿上干净的白衣,他还是因为被愤怒控制而显得丑。比丘们,这就是第一种让怨敌如愿、让怨敌称心,会落到易怒的男人或女人身上的法。巴利
‘‘Sattime , bhikkhave, dhammā sapattakantā sapattakaraṇā kodhanaṃ āgacchanti itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā. Katame satta? Idha, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa evaṃ icchati, ‘aho vatāyaṃ dubbaṇṇo assā’ti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa vaṇṇavatāya nandati. Kodhanoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo kodhābhibhūto kodhapareto kiñcāpi so hoti sunhāto suvilitto kappitakesamassu odātavatthavasano, atha kho so dubbaṇṇova hoti kodhābhibhūto. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamo dhammo sapattakanto sapattakaraṇo kodhanaṃ āgacchati itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā.
比丘们,再说,怨敌对自己的仇敌会这样希望:但愿这个人痛苦地躺着……乃至……但愿他没有利益……乃至……但愿他没有财富……乃至……但愿他没有名声……乃至……但愿他没有朋友……乃至……但愿他身体坏散、死后投生到苦处、恶趣、堕处、地狱。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为怨敌不会因仇敌投生善趣而高兴。比丘们,这个易怒的人,被愤怒压倒、被愤怒控制,以身行恶行,以语行恶行,以意行恶行。他以身行恶行、以语行恶行、以意行恶行之后,身体坏散、死后……乃至……投生到地狱,他就是被愤怒压倒的人。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa evaṃ icchati ‘aho vatāyaṃ dukkhaṃ sayeyyā’ti…pe… na pacurattho assāti…pe… na bhogavā assāti…pe… na yasavā assāti…pe… na mittavā assāti…pe… kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjeyyāti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, sapatto sapattassa sugatigamane nandati. Kodhanoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo kodhābhibhūto kodhapareto kāyena duccaritaṃ carati, vācāya duccaritaṃ carati, manasā duccaritaṃ carati. So kāyena duccaritaṃ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṃ caritvā manasā duccaritaṃ caritvā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā…pe… nirayaṃ upapajjati kodhābhibhūto’’ti (a. ni. 7.64).
愤怒的人不知道什么是有利的,愤怒的人看不见法。
应当舍弃愤怒,放下傲慢,超越一切束缚。
愤怒会生出无益之事,愤怒会搅乱内心……
把嗔怒砍断,就能安乐地睡觉;把嗔怒砍断,就不会忧愁。
婆罗门啊,嗔怒的根是苦的,顶端却是甜的。
具有广大智慧的人,请宽恕这一个过错。
智者不会靠嗔怒的力量行事。巴利
‘‘Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati…pe…. (a. ni. 7.64); ‘‘Kodhaṃ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṃ, saṃyojanaṃ sabbamatikkameyya. (dha. pa. 221); ‘‘Anatthajanano kodho, kodho cittappakopano…pe…. (a. ni. 7.64); ‘‘Kodhaṃ chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kodhaṃ chetvā na socati; Kodhassa visamūlassa, madhuraggassa brāhmaṇā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187); ‘‘Ekāparādhaṃ khama bhūripañña, Na paṇḍitā kodhabalā bhavantī’’ti. –
像这样,以这种次第,从所说的过患之反面——即断嗔的功德——来观察嗔的过患与功德,在修行前期,按“彼分断”等方式暂时舍断嗔,再进一步策励修观,最后通过第三道彻底断除嗔。这就是劝导那些比丘的用意所在。因此说:“诸比丘,应当断除一法,就是嗔。”所谓“心被嗔害者”,是指因为愤恨而心被染污、败坏。这里其余应当说明的内容,都按照初经注释中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Evamādinā nayena dose ādīnave vuttappaṭipakkhato dosappahāne ānisaṃse ca paccavekkhitvā pubbabhāge dosaṃ tadaṅgappahānādivasena pajahitvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena sabbaso dosaṃ samucchindatha, pajahathāti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tattha niyojanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dosaṃ, bhikkhave, ekadhammaṃ pajahathā’’ti. Duṭṭhāseti āghātena dūsitacittatāya paduṭṭhā. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayameva.
第3经 愚痴经的注释巴利
3. Mohasuttavaṇṇanā
3 在第三经中,“痴”就是无知。因为它是对苦的无知,对苦集的无知,对苦灭的无知,对通往苦灭之道的无知,如此等等,按这种方式分类,虽然有许多种差别,但都是被痴所迷乱。由于它自己迷乱,或者只是迷乱本身,所以称为“痴”。它以令心盲目为特相,或者以无知为特相;以不能通达为作用,或者以遮蔽所缘的自性为作用;以不如理修行为现起,或者以黑暗为现起;以不如理作意为近因。应当知道,它是一切不善法的根。在这里,“应断除”这句话的含义——巴利
3. Tatiye mohanti aññāṇaṃ. Tañhi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇantiādinā nayena vibhāgena anekappabhedampi muyhanti. Tena sayaṃ vā muyhati muyhanamattameva vā tanti mohoti vuccati. So cittassa andhabhāvalakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā, asampaṭivedharaso, ārammaṇasabhāvacchādanaraso vā, asammāppaṭipattipaccupaṭṭhāno, andhakārapaccupaṭṭhāno vā, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhāno, sabbākusalānaṃ mūlanti daṭṭhabbo. Idhāpi pajahathāti padassa –
愚痴的人不知道什么是有益的,愚痴的人看不见法。
那时,当愚痴压倒一个人,就成了彻底的黑暗。
愚痴会带来无益。
比丘们,无明是不善法生起的前导。
世间被愚痴缠住,看起来却好像能有所成就。
痴是诸业生起的因缘。巴利
‘‘Mūḷho atthaṃ na jānāti, mūḷho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ moho sahate naraṃ’’. (itivu. 88); ‘‘Anatthajanano moho…pe…. (itivu. 88); ‘‘Avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ (itivu. 40); ‘‘Mohasambandhano loko, bhabbarūpova dissati’’; (Udā. 70); ‘‘Moho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāya’’ (a. ni. 3.34);
婆罗门,愚痴的人确实被痴所压倒,心被彻底控制,在现世就会生出恐惧和怨恨,来世也会生出恐惧和怨恨。巴利
‘‘Mūḷho kho, brāhmaṇa, mohena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto diṭṭhadhammikampi bhayaṃ veraṃ pasavati, samparāyikampi bhayaṃ veraṃ pasavatī’’ti ca –
按照这样的方法,应当这样观察:“凡是任何由欲贪等杂染法所生起的法,从实质上来说,那全都是以愚痴为因的。”观察了愚痴的过患,又从与它相对治的断除愚痴这一面观察了功德之后,在正式修行之前的前分阶段,随着依次断除欲贪等的进程,以一分断等方式正在断除愚痴,最终应当以第三道,以彻底断除的方式,断除前面所说的与贪、嗔共存的愚痴。这就是这里应当理解的意思。因为这里所说的愚痴,正是只有不来道才能断除的。所谓“迷昧者”,就是指对于善与不善、有罪与无罪等种种差别中,自己的利益与不利完全迷昧的人。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
Ādinā nayena ‘‘yo koci dhammo kāmacchandādisaṃkilesadhammehi nibbattetabbo, atthato sabbo so mohahetuko’’ti ca mohe ādīnavaṃ tappaṭipakkhato mohappahāne ānisaṃsañca paccavekkhitvā kāmacchandādippahānakkameneva pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena mohaṃ pajahantā tatiyamaggena yathāvuttalobhadosekaṭṭhaṃ mohaṃ samucchedavasena pajahathāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Anāgāmimaggavajjho eva hi moho idhādhippetoti. Mūḷhāseti kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjādibhede attano hitāhite sammūḷhā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第四经的注释,即《忿怒经》的注释。巴利
4. Kodhasuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四经中,“kodha”指的就是嗔。嗔本身即以“kodha”这一同义语,随顺那些借此同义语而理解之人的意向而这样说的。因此,这里的含义应当依照第二经所讲的方式来理解。另外,嗔以恼怒为特相,以制造怨恨为作用,以心的败坏状态为现起,还应当看到它是心的腐坏,这个差别也要知道。巴利
4. Catutthe kodhanti dosaṃ. Doso eva hi kodhapariyāyena bujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena evaṃ vutto. Tasmā dutiyasutte vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. Apica kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, āghātakaraṇaraso, cittassa byāpattibhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno, cetaso pūtibhāvoti daṭṭhabboti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
第五经注释巴利
5. Makkhasuttavaṇṇanā
5 第五中,“makkha”是指覆藏他人的功德。虽然这种人就像抓起粪便去打别人一样,最先弄脏的其实是自己的手,但因为他生起的意图就是要覆藏他人的功德,所以被称为“覆藏他人功德”。就像擦身的布会擦掉沐浴者身上的水一样,他也同样覆藏、抹去、毁坏他人的功德;又或者,因为他抛弃、毁坏他人所成就的广大善行,所以称为“makkha”。它以覆藏他人功德为特相,以毁坏这些功德为作用,以遮蔽这些功德为现起。从义理上说,应当知道它就是一种以覆藏他人功德的方式生起的、与忧受相应的心生起。“应断除”:在这里,观察了所说的种种嗔,以及前面针对嗔所说的过患和断除它的利益之后,在预备阶段以彼分断等方式来断除,并努力修习观,最终以第三道毫无剩余地彻底斩断——这就是其含义。“Makkhā”:指已涂抹者、已涂抹他人功德者、他人功德之涂抹者,正因如此自身功德亦被毁坏者。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
5. Pañcame makkhanti paraguṇamakkhanaṃ. Yadipi hi so gūthaṃ gahetvā paraṃ paharanto viya attano karaṃ paṭhamataraṃ makkhatiyeva, tathāpi paresaṃ guṇamakkhanādhippāyena pavattetabbattā ‘‘paraguṇamakkhano’’ti vuccati. Tathā hi so udakapuñchanamiva nhātassa sarīragataṃ udakaṃ paresaṃ guṇe makkheti puñchati vināseti , parehi vā katānaṃ mahantānampi kārānaṃ khepanato dhaṃsanato makkhoti vuccati. So paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo, tesaṃ vināsanaraso, tadavacchādanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Atthato pana paresaṃ guṇamakkhanākārena pavatto domanassasahagatacittuppādoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pajahathāti tattha vuttappabhedaṃ dosaṃ, dose ca vuttanayaṃ ādīnavaṃ, pahāne cassa ānisaṃsaṃ paccavekkhitvā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena pajahantā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā tatiyamaggena anavasesaṃ samucchindathāti attho. Makkhāseti makkhitā makkhitaparaguṇā, paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhitāro, tato eva attanopi dhaṃsitaguṇāti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
6. 《慢经》的注释巴利
6. Mānasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六经中说的“慢”,是指以出身等为基础而心生高举。因为它以“我比别人强”等方式去认定,或者它自己就这么认定,又或者它有衡量、抬高的性质,所以称为“慢”。这种慢分三种:我比别人强的慢、我和别人相等的慢、我比别人差的慢。再进一步又分成九种:强的人起“我比别人强”的慢,强的人起“我和别人相等”的慢,强的人起“我比别人差”的慢;相等的人起“我比别人强”的慢,相等的人起“我和别人相等”的慢,相等的人起“我比别人差”的慢;差的人起“我比别人强”的慢,差的人起“我和别人相等”的慢,差的人起“我比别人差”的慢。这九种慢都以心的高举为特征,以执取“我”为作用,或者以高举为作用;它的表现是内心像充了气一样膨胀,或者表现为渴望出人头地;它的直接原因是与邪见不相应的贪爱,应当把它看作疯狂。“应当断除”的意思是:要观察到慢的过患——它是一切抬高自己、贬低他人的根源;也是对于应当恭敬的人不去行礼、不合掌、不尽应尽义务的原因;还是以出身骄、以男子气骄等而导致放逸的原因。再从与慢相反的一面,观察到无慢的功德,然后在心中建立起像贱民进入王宫集会时那样的谦卑心态,在修行前期以暂时断除等方式舍弃它,进而修习观禅,最终以不来道把它彻底断除。这里所说的慢,正是只有不来道才能断除的慢。“放逸的人”是指那些以出身骄、以男子气骄等慢而放逸,抬高自己而生活的人。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
6. Chaṭṭhe mānanti jātiādivatthukaṃ cetaso unnamanaṃ. So hi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā nayena maññanti tena, sayaṃ vā maññati, mānanaṃ sampaggahoti vā mānoti vuccati. Svāyaṃ seyyohamasmīti māno, sadisohamasmīti māno, hīnohamasmīti mānoti evaṃ tividho. Puna seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno, seyyassa sadiso, seyyassa hīno; sadisassa seyyo, sadisassa sadiso, sadisassa hīno; hīnassa seyyo, hīnassa sadiso, hīnassa hīnohamasmīti mānoti evaṃ navavidhopi unnatilakkhaṇo, ahaṃkāraraso, sampaggaharaso vā, uddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno, ketukamyatāpaccupaṭṭhāno vā, diṭṭhivippayuttalobhapadaṭṭhāno ummādo viyāti daṭṭhabbo. Pajahathāti tassa sabbassapi attukkaṃsanaparavambhananimittatā, garuṭṭhāniyesu abhivādanapaccupaṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammādīnaṃ akaraṇe kāraṇatā, jātimadapurisamadādibhāvena pamādāpattihetubhāvoti evamādibhedaṃ ādīnavaṃ tappaṭipakkhato niratimānatāya ānisaṃsañca paccavekkhitvā rājasabhaṃ anuppatto caṇḍālo viya sabrahmacārīsu nīcacittataṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena taṃ pajahantā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmimaggena samucchindathāti attho. Anāgāmimaggavajjho eva hi māno idhādhippeto. Mattāseti jātimadapurisamadādivasena mānena pamādāpattihetubhūtena mattā attānaṃ paggahetvā carantā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在这六部依次排列的经和偈颂里,开示都是以证得不来果为终点。其中,按照投生处的不同,有五种不来者:投生到无烦天、无热天、善现天、善见天、色究竟天。投生在无烦天的,就叫无烦天。他们有五种:中般涅槃、生般涅槃、无行般涅槃、有行般涅槃、上流至色究竟天。无热天、善现天、善见天也一样。但在色究竟天,上流至色究竟天这一种就不适用了。
其中,有人在无烦天等处投生后,还没活到寿命的一半就证得阿罗汉果,以烦恼灭尽而般涅槃,这叫中般涅槃。有人在无烦天等处,超过了寿命的一半——比如五百劫等寿量的一半——之后才般涅槃,这叫生般涅槃。有人不用刻意加行,没有大痛苦,轻轻松松就般涅槃,这叫无行般涅槃。有人必须刻意加行,经历痛苦、艰难、费力才般涅槃,这叫有行般涅槃。还有一种,在无烦天等处投生后,不能证得阿罗汉果,就在那里活完应有的寿命,然后以结生的方式前往色究竟天。因为他的渴爱之流、轮回之流或道之流是向上走的,所以叫上流;又因为他前往色究竟天,所以叫至色究竟天者。巴利
Imesu pana paṭipāṭiyā chasu suttesu gāthāsu vā anāgāmiphalaṃ pāpetvā desanā niṭṭhāpitā. Tattha ye ime avihā atappā sudassā sudassī akaniṭṭhāti upapattibhavavasena pañca anāgāmino, tesu avihesu upapannā avihā nāma. Te antarāparinibbāyī, upahaccaparinibbāyī, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīti pañcavidhā, tathā atappā, sudassā, sudassino. Akaniṭṭhesu pana uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī parihāyati. Tattha yo avihādīsu uppajjitvā āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā arahattappattiyā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ antarāparinibbāyī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu ādito pañcakappasatādibhedaṃ āyuvemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ upahaccaparinibbāyī nāma. Yo asaṅkhārena adhimattappayogaṃ akatvā appadukkhena akasirena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī nāma. Yo pana sasaṅkhārena adhimattappayogaṃ katvā dukkhena kicchena kasirena parinibbāyati, ayaṃ sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī nāma. Itaro pana avihādīsu uddhaṃvāhitabhāvena uddhamassa taṇhāsotaṃ, vaṭṭasotaṃ, maggasotameva vāti uddhaṃsoto. Avihādīsu uppajjitvā arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkonto tattha tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī.
在这里,还要知道有四种情况:上流并且前往色究竟天、上流但不前往色究竟天、不是上流但前往色究竟天、不是上流也不前往色究竟天。怎么理解呢?如果有人从无烦天开始,依次经过四个天界,最后到达色究竟天并在那里般涅槃,这就叫“上流并且前往色究竟天”。如果有人经过下面三个天界,停在善见天并在那里般涅槃,这就叫“上流但不前往色究竟天”。如果有人直接前往色究竟天并在那里般涅槃,这就叫“不是上流但前往色究竟天”。如果有人在下四个天界中随所生之处就在那里般涅槃,这就叫“不是上流也不前往色究竟天”。巴利
Ettha ca uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī, na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmīti catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Yo avihato paṭṭhāya cattāro devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā tayo devaloke sodhetvā sudassīdevaloke ṭhatvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo ito akaniṭṭhameva gantvā parinibbāyati , ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā catūsu devalokesu tattha tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāmāti.
在这里,投生到无烦天的有三种中般涅槃者:投生后超过一百劫才般涅槃的,在满二百劫时般涅槃的,未满五百劫就般涅槃的。经中确实这样说:“或者刚投生就般涅槃,或者还没到中间就般涅槃。”这里“或者”这个词,也把“刚好到中间才般涅槃”的情况包括进去了。这样,无烦天就有三种中般涅槃者、一种生般涅槃者、一种上流者。在这些当中,无行般涅槃者有五种,有行般涅槃者有五种,合起来就是十种。同样,无热天、善现天、善见天也各有十种,一共四十种。但色究竟天没有上流者,所以那里有三种中般涅槃者、一种生般涅槃者,也就是无行般涅槃者四种、有行般涅槃者四种,共八种。这样加起来,这些不来者一共是四十八种。应当知道,他们全都被这些经中不加分别的说法所涵盖。巴利
Tattha avihesu uppajjitvā kappasatato uddhaṃ parinibbāyiko, dvinnaṃ kappasatānaṃ matthake parinibbāyiko, pañcakappasate asampatte parinibbāyikoti tayo antarāparinibbāyino. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘upapannaṃ vā samanantarā appattaṃ vā vemajjha’’nti (pu. pa. 36). Vā-saddena hi pattamattopi saṅgahitoti. Evaṃ tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī eko uddhaṃsoto. Tesu asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañca, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañcāti dasa honti. Tathā atappāsudassāsudassīsūti cattāro dasakā cattārīsaṃ akaniṭṭhe pana uddhaṃsotassa abhāvato tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyīti asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāro, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāroti aṭṭha, evamete aṭṭhacattārīsaṃ anāgāmino. Te sabbepi imesu suttesu avisesavacanena gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第七部《一切遍知经》的注释巴利
7. Sabbapariññāsuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七经中,“一切”指没有剩余。因为“一切”这个词就是表达没有剩余。它和什么相关联,就显示那个东西没有剩余,比如“一切色”“一切受”“一切有身所摄诸法”。不过这个“一切”一词,按有范围和无范围的对象,分为两种。它在四种对象上被使用:一切的一切、部分的一切、处的一切、有身的一切。其中,在“一切法以一切行相来到佛陀、世尊的智门”这类句子中,用的是“一切的一切”。在“舍利弗,我以略说开示你们所有人的善说”这类句子中,用的是“部分的一切”。在“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说一切,就是眼与色……乃至意与法”中,用的是“处的一切”。在“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说一切法的根本分类”这类句子中,用的是“有身的一切”。其中,用在“一切的一切”时,是无范围的对象;用在其余三种时,是有范围的对象。但在这里,应当知道是指“有身的一切”。因为作为观行所缘的三界法,在这里被无余地取为“一切”。巴利
7. Sattame sabbanti anavasesaṃ. Anavasesavācako hi ayaṃ sabba-saddo. So yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpeti; yathā ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ, sabbā vedanā, sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesū’’ti. So panāyaṃ sabba-saddo sappadesanippadesavisayatāya duvidho. Tathā hesa sabbasabbaṃ, padesasabbaṃ, āyatanasabbaṃ, sakkāyasabbanti catūsu visayesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tattha ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputtā, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) padesasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, cakkhuñceva rūpañca…pe…. Manañceva dhamme cā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23-25) ettha āyatanasabbasmiṃ. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) sakkāyasabbasmiṃ. Tattha sabbasabbasmiṃ āgato nippadesavisayo, itaresu tīsupi āgato sappadesavisayo . Idha pana sakkāyasabbasmiṃ veditabbo. Vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakadhammā hi idha ‘‘sabba’’nti anavasesato gahitā.
他们不能如实了知这一切应当被了知的法,不能以殊胜的智慧了知,比如“这些法是善的,这些法是不善的,这些法有过失,这些法没有过失”,以及“这是五蕴,这是十二处,这是十八界,这是苦圣谛,这是苦集圣谛”等等,不能按照它们不颠倒的真实本性去了知。不能完全了知,就是不能彻底地了知。因为,能完全了知一切三界诸法的人,是通过三种遍知来了知的,即:知遍知、度遍知、断遍知。其中,什么是知遍知?就是对一切三界的名色,知道“这是色,色的量只有这么多,不会超出这个范围;这是名,名的量只有这么多,不会超出这个范围”,依照地、净色等类别来区分色,依照触等类别来区分名,再依据相、味、现起、足处来界定它们,同时把握它们以无明等为缘。这就是知遍知。什么是度遍知?就是像这样了知之后,以无常、苦、如病等四十二种行相来观察这一切。这就是度遍知。什么是断遍知?就是像这样观察之后,以最高的圣道断除对这一切的欲贪。这就是断遍知。巴利
Anabhijānanti ‘‘ime dhammā kusalā, ime akusalā, ime sāvajjā, ime anavajjā’’tiādinā ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā, imāni dvādasāyatanāni, imā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ariyasacca’’nti ca ādinā sabbe abhiññeyye dhamme aviparītasabhāvato anabhijānanto abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena na jānanto. Aparijānanti na parijānanto. Yo hi sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti – ñātapariññāya, tīraṇapariññāya, pahānapariññāya. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ nāmarūpaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo. Idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti bhūtappasādādippabhedaṃ rūpaṃ, phassādippabhedaṃ nāmañca, lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānato vavatthapeti. Tassa avijjādikañca paccayaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā taṃ sabbaṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi. Ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena sabbasmiṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Ayaṃ pahānapariññā.
见清净和度疑清净也属于知遍知。道非道行智见清净,直到以聚思维等修行达到随顺智为止,这中间的慧属于审察遍知。通过圣道断除烦恼,就是断遍知。谁能完全了知一切,谁就是通过这三种遍知来了知。不过在这里,因为“离贪”和“断除”是被分开强调、以遮止的方式来说的,所以这里的“遍了知”应当理解为依知遍知和审察遍知来说的。至于不能这样完全了知的人,世尊就是针对他而说“不遍了”。巴利
Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiyopi ñātapariññā. Maggāmaggapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiyo kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā vā paññā tīraṇapariññā. Ariyamaggena pajahanaṃ pahānapariññā. Yo sabbaṃ parijānāti, so imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti. Idha pana virāgappahānānaṃ paṭikkhepavasena visuṃ gahitattā ñātapariññāya tīraṇapariññāya ca vasena parijānanā veditabbā. Yo panevaṃ na parijānāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘aparijāna’’nti.
在这里,“心不远离”的意思是:对于那个应当证知、应当完全了知的殊胜境界,不让自己的心相续远离贪染,也就是不使心处于离贪的状态;他们不生起能令那里无贪的离贪随观。这是这句话的意思。“不摒弃”的意思是:不以与观智相应的道智,把在那里应当断除的烦恼轮转毫无剩余地舍弃。正如这里所说,对于“证知”等,也应当结合混合的道来理解。因为在预备阶段,依不同心识的作用,通过知遍知、度遍知、断遍知依次完成“证知”等;而到了道的时刻,只有一种智在同一刹那生起,依其作用而完成这一切。“无能力尽灭苦”的意思是:对于涅槃,也就是消尽整个轮回之苦,他们没有能力、不够格、不能胜任。巴利
Tattha cittaṃ avirājayanti tasmiṃ abhiññeyyavisese pariññeyye attano cittasantānaṃ na virājayaṃ, na virajjanto; yathā tattha rāgo na hoti, evaṃ virāgānupassanaṃ na uppādentoti attho. Appajahanti vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya tattha pahātabbayuttakaṃ kilesavaṭṭaṃ anavasesato na pajahanto. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ abhijānanādayopi missakamaggavasena veditabbā. Pubbabhāge hi nānācittavasena ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāhi kamena abhijānanādīni sampādetvā maggakāle ekakkhaṇeneva kiccavasena taṃ sabbaṃ nipphādentaṃ ekameva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti. Abhabbo dukkhakkhayāyāti nibbānāya sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa khepanāya na bhabbo, nālaṃ na samatthoti attho.
在这句“凡一切且”里,“且”字表示排除,“凡”字表示限定。通过这两者,说明从遍知等所得到的殊胜,以及苦灭的唯一原因。关于遍知等应当说的内容,前面已经说过了。不过那里是从否定的角度说的,这里则应当从肯定的角度来理解,这就是差别所在。再者,“遍知”是指,对被称为五取蕴的整个有身,从自相和缘两方面,以智慧现前把握,成为遍知者,并通过把握其坏灭的行相,以无常等相加以限定,从而遍知。“令离染”是指,由于如实通达无常等,生起怖畏、过患、厌离等慧的作用,使自己的心离染,在那里连极微小的贪也不生起。“令断”是指,以与导向出起的观慧相应的道智,断除、根除属于集方面的烦恼轮转。“堪能于苦尽”是指,由于这样断除了烦恼垢秽,一切业轮转都已穷尽,为了彻底舍弃所有果报轮转,或者为了穷尽整个轮回之苦,或者为了证入无余涅槃界,他确实能够证得此。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Sabbañca khoti ettha ca-saddo byatireke, kho-saddo avadhāraṇe. Tadubhayena abhijānanādito laddhabbaṃ visesaṃ dukkhakkhayassa ca ekantakāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Abhijānanādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva. Tattha pana paṭikkhepavasena vuttaṃ, idha vidhānavasena veditabbaṃ. Ayameva viseso. Apica abhijānanti upādānakkhandhapañcakasaṅkhātaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ sarūpato paccayato ca ñāṇassa abhimukhīkaraṇavasena abhijānanto hutvā abhāvākārādipariggahena taṃ aniccādilakkhaṇehi paricchijjamānavasena parijānanto. Virājayanti sammadevassa aniccatādiavabodhena uppannabhayādīnavanibbidādiñāṇānubhāvena attano cittaṃ virattaṃ karonto tattha aṇumattampi rāgaṃ anuppādento. Pajahanti vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāsahitāya maggapaññāya samudayapakkhiyaṃ kilesavaṭṭaṃ pajahanto samucchindanto. Bhabbo dukkhakkhayāyāti evaṃ kilesamalappahāneneva sabbassa kammavaṭṭassa parikkhīṇattā anavasesavipākavaṭṭakhepanāya sakalasaṃsāravaṭṭadukkhaparikkhayabhūtāya vā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā bhabbo ekantenetaṃ pāpuṇitunti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
已经以相应修行精勤、生起观慧的瑜伽行者,从一切方面了知一切,也就是以各种部分、各种分类——比如按善等蕴等来分,按苦性、逼迫性等来分——了知三界所摄的一切法;或者,“从一切”是指从硬、触等自相,从无常等一切行相来了知。了知之后,以观为前导的道智通达,或者单以观智作为了知的原因。他对一切处都不染著:对依过去等而有种种差别的一切有身之法,他因证得圣道而不生贪著,所以不染著。这里借此显示他没有渴爱的执取,由于渴爱执取是见执与慢执的因缘,故亦借此显示“这是我的、这是我、这是我的自我”这三种邪执的不存在。所谓“遍知一切”,即因完全遍知一切,以现证方式遍知前述之一切。在“sa ve”之中,“sa”仅是助词;“ve”是明确地、绝对地的语气词;这里的“彼”指前文所说的修行者,或可指圣者;所谓“超越了一切苦”,就是超越、度越了轮回中一切的苦。巴利
Yo sabbaṃ sabbato ñatvāti yo yuttayogo āraddhavipassako sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ sabbato sabbabhāgena kusalādikkhandhādivibhāgato dukkhādipīḷanādivibhāgato ca. Atha vā sabbatoti sabbasmā kakkhaḷaphusanādilakkhaṇādito aniccādito cāti sabbākārato jānitvā vipassanāpubbaṅgamena maggañāṇena paṭivijjhitvā, vipassanāñāṇeneva vā jānanahetu. Sabbatthesu na rajjatīti sabbesu atītādivasena anekabhedabhinnesu sakkāyadhammesu na rajjati, ariyamaggādhigamena rāgaṃ na janeti. Imināssa taṇhāgāhassa abhāvaṃ dassento taṃ nimittattā diṭṭhamānaggāhānaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti imassa micchāgāhattayassapi abhāvaṃ dasseti. Sa veti ettha sa-iti nipātamattaṃ. Ve-ti byattaṃ, ekaṃsenāti vā etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Sabbapariññāti sabbaparijānanato, yathāvuttassa sabbassa abhisamayavasena parijānanato. Soti yathāvutto yogāvacaro, ariyo eva vā. Sabbadukkhamupaccagāti sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ accagā atikkami, samatikkamīti attho.
第八经 慢遍知经的注释巴利
8. Mānapariññāsuttavaṇṇanā
8 第八经的注释:这部经没有新的内容,整篇开示完全是围绕“慢”展开的。在偈颂中,“这些众生为慢所系”——众生,是因为被业和烦恼所生,所以得到“众生”这个名字;这些有情被以想象为特征的慢所具足、所趋近。“被慢的结缚绑住,乐于存在”——意思是,即使投生为虫、蛆、飞蛾等生命形态,也被慢缠缚,与慢的结缚相应。正因为如此,长久以来被我执所熏习,对诸行强烈执取“这是我的”,又因为常、乐、我、净等颠倒想,而乐于欲有等种种存在。“不遍知慢”——指不以三种遍知来了知慢,或者没有以阿罗汉道的智慧超越慢;也有人读作“不遍知慢已”。“成为后有的来者”——即成为未来再生的来者。或者,因为一再地生起,在称为“后有”的轮回中不断辗转往来、趋入,也就是不能从存在中解脱的意思。“而那些已断除慢、于慢灭尽中解脱的人”——指那些以阿罗汉道彻底断除了慢,在慢究竟灭尽的阿罗汉果位或涅槃中,以与彼同在的一切烦恼的解脱而解脱,善解脱、彻底解脱的人。“他们是慢结的战胜者,超越了一切苦”——指那些已尽后有结的阿罗汉,以彻底断除的方式完全摧毁了慢的缠缚与慢的结缚,安住其中,因而超越了轮回中的一切苦。以上就是这部经和第七部经中关于阿罗汉果的论述。巴利
8. Aṭṭhame apubbaṃ natthi, kevalaṃ mānavasena desanā pavattā. Gāthāsu pana mānupetā ayaṃ pajāti kammakilesehi pajāyatīti pajāti laddhanāmā ime sattā maññanalakkhaṇena mānena upetā upagatā. Mānaganthā bhave ratāti kimikīṭapaṭaṅgādiattabhāvepi mānena ganthitā mānasaṃyojanena saṃyuttā. Tato eva dīgharattaṃ paribhāvitāhaṃkāravasena ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti saṅkhāresu ajjhosānabahulattā tattha niccasukhaattādivipallāsavasena ca kāmādibhave ratā. Mānaṃ aparijānantāti mānaṃ tīhi pariññāhi na parijānantā. Arahattamaggañāṇena vā anatikkamantā, ‘‘mānaṃ apariññāyā’’ti keci paṭhanti. Āgantāro punabbhavanti puna āyātiṃ upapattibhavaṃ. Punappunaṃ bhavanato vā punabbhavasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ aparāparaṃ parivattanavasena gantāro upagantāro honti, bhavato na parimuccantīti attho. Ye ca mānaṃ pahantvāna, vimuttā mānasaṅkhayeti ye pana arahattamaggena sabbaso mānaṃ pajahitvā mānassa accantasaṅkhayabhūte arahattaphale nibbāne vā tadekaṭṭhasabbakilesavimuttiyā vimuttā suṭṭhu muttā. Te mānaganthābhibhuno, sabbadukkhamupaccagunti te parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanā arahanto sabbaso mānaganthaṃ mānasaṃyojanaṃ samucchedappahānena abhibhavitvā ṭhitā, anavasesaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ atikkamiṃsūti attho. Evametasmiṃ sattamasutte ca arahattaṃ kathitanti.
9-10. 《贪遍知经》和《嗔遍知经》两部经的注疏巴利
9-10. Lobhadosapariññāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
9-10 第九和第十部经里没有新的内容。应当这样理解:这是依说法之善巧庄严,或者是随顺那些能以此方式被教化的众生的根机意乐,才那样宣说的。巴利
9-10. Navamadasamesu apubbaṃ natthi. Desanāvilāsavasena tathā bujjhanakānaṃ veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vā tathā desitānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
《痴遍知经》等经的注疏巴利
1-3. Mohapariññādisuttavaṇṇanā
11-13 在第二品里,开头三部经也和前面说的一样,说法的方式和理由也都已经讲过了。巴利
11-13. Dutiyavaggepi paṭhamādīni tīṇi suttāni vuttanayāneva, tathā desanākāraṇampi vuttameva.
4. 《无明盖经》的注释巴利
4. Avijjānīvaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 第十四段:在“诸比丘,我不……”等语句中,“不”字表示否定。“我”是世尊指称自己。“其他”是指除了现在所说的无明盖之外的别的。“哪怕一种盖”就是哪怕一种属于盖的法。“我观见”有两种观见:邪见的观见和正智的观见。其中,像“认为色是我”等所说的,叫邪见的观见;而像“观见为无常,不是常恒”等所说的,叫正智的观见。这里指的是正智的观见。而且“我观见”这个词和否定词“不”连在一起。这段话的意思是:“诸比丘,我即使以称为一切知智的周遍眼,像看掌中的余甘子一样观察一切法,也看不到任何其他哪怕一种盖。”巴利
14. Catutthe – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādīsu na-kāro paṭisedhattho. Ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Aññanti idāni vattabbaavijjānīvaraṇato aññaṃ. Ekanīvaraṇampīti ekanīvaraṇadhammampi. Samanupassāmīti dve samanupassanā – diṭṭhisamanupassanā ca ñāṇasamanupassanā ca. Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.200; paṭi. ma. 1.130) āgatā ayaṃ diṭṭhisamanupassanā nāma. ‘‘Aniccato samanupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.35) pana āgatā ayaṃ ñāṇasamanupassanā nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇasamanupassanāva adhippetā. ‘‘Samanupassāmī’’ti ca padassa na-kārena sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātena samantacakkhunā sabbadhamme hatthāmalakaṃ viya olokentopi aññaṃ ekanīvaraṇampi na samanupassāmī’’ti.
众生被哪一种盖所遮蔽,才在漫长的时间里到处奔走、轮回流转?因为这种盖具有盖的本性,它不让人去了知、看见、通达法的真实面貌,而是把法的真实面貌遮盖、包住、挡住。众生被这样的黑暗所遮蔽,在找不到起点的轮回里,在数不清的劫数中,在各种大大小小的生存状态里,一次又一次地投生,因此到处奔走,也不断轮回。或者,因为所缘对象不断变换而转移,这叫“奔走”;因为不断投生到别的生存状态而转移,这叫“轮回”。或者,烦恼强的时候叫“奔走”,烦恼弱的时候叫“轮回”。或者,从刹那生灭的死来说,一生之中的迁移叫“奔走”;从世俗意义上的死来说,在多生之中的迁移叫“轮回”。或者,随顺心而转起叫“奔走”,就像经里说的“他的心到处奔驰”;随顺业而转起叫“轮回”。应当这样理解“奔走”和“轮回”的差别。巴利
Yena nīvaraṇena nivutā pajā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsarantīti yena nīvaraṇakasabhāvattā nīvaraṇena dhammasabhāvaṃ jānituṃ passituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ adatvā chādetvā pariyonandhitvā ṭhānena andhakārena nivutā sattā anādimatasaṃsāre aparimāṇe kappe mahantesu ceva khuddakesu ca bhavādīsu aparāparuppattivasena sabbato dhāvanti ceva saṃsaranti, ca. Ārammaṇantarasaṅkamanavasena vā sandhāvanaṃ, bhavantarasaṅkamanavasena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Kilesānaṃ balavabhāvena vā sandhāvanaṃ, dubbalabhāvena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Khaṇikamaraṇavasena vā ekajātiyaṃ sandhāvanaṃ, vohāramaraṇavasena anekāsu jātīsu saṃsaraṇaṃ. Cittavasena vā sandhāvanaṃ, ‘‘cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ, kammavasena saṃsaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sandhāvanasaṃsaraṇānaṃ viseso veditabbo.
“如同这个”就是“像这样”。“y”是连接词,因为连音的关系而缩短了元音。
关于“无明盖”:在这里,以“不应得到”的含义,身恶行等被称为“不应得”,也就是得不到的意思。它却去“得到”那不应得的,所以叫“无明”。反过来,身善行等被称为“应得”,它却不去得到那应得的,所以也叫“无明”。它使人不了知:蕴的积聚之义、处的处之义、界的空之义、根的增上之义、谛的如实之义,以及苦等以逼迫等方式所说的四种含义——所以也是“无明”。或者,它让众生在无边无际的轮回中奔驰,所以是“无明”;或者在究竟意义上并不存在的女人、男人等概念中奔驰、现起,而在真实存在的蕴等法上不奔驰、不现起,所以是“无明”。再者,因为它遮盖了眼识等的依处和所缘,也遮盖了缘起和缘生法,所以也是“无明”。无明本身就是盖,所以叫“无明盖”。巴利
Yathayidanti yathā idaṃ. Ya-kāro padasandhikaro, sandhivasena rassattaṃ. Avijjānīvaraṇanti ettha pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Viparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ ādhipateyyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Antavirahite saṃsāre satte javāpetīti vā avijjā, paramatthato vā avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati pavattati, vijjamānesu khandhādīsu na javati, na pavattatīti avijjā. Apica cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā. Avijjāva nīvaraṇanti avijjānīvaraṇaṃ.
比丘们,众生被无明盖遮蔽,长久以来在轮回中流转奔波——这句话是为了加强前面那句话的分量。或者说,前面那句“比丘们,就像这无明盖一样”是从比喻的角度说的,而这句话则是从显示盖的作用力的角度说的。那么,为什么这里只提到无明,而不提其他法呢?因为无明在遮蔽过患的同时,也是贪欲等烦恼生起的特殊条件。事实正是如此:当对象上的过患被无明遮蔽之后,贪欲等烦恼就在这些对象上生起了。巴利
Avijjānīvaraṇena hi, bhikkhave, nivutā pajā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsarantīti idaṃ purimasseva daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Purimaṃ vā – ‘‘yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, avijjānīvaraṇa’’nti evaṃ opammadassanavasena vuttaṃ, idaṃ nīvaraṇānubhāvadassanavasena. Kasmā panettha avijjāva evaṃ vuttā, na aññe dhammāti? Ādīnavapaṭicchādanena kāmacchandādīnaṃ visesappaccayabhāvato. Tathā hi tāya paṭicchāditādīnave visaye kāmacchandādayo pavattanti.
“别无其他”等偈颂,是为了总摄已说和未说的义理而说的。其中,“被覆蔽”就是被障碍、被缠绕,意思是被遮盖。“日夜”指白天和夜晚,也就是一切时候。“如同被痴所覆”是说:众生被名为无明盖的痴以某种方式所覆蔽、所遮盖,即使对很容易了知的事也不能了知,因此在轮回中流转;应当这样连接文意:像这样的其他任何一个法、任何一种盖都不存在。“而那些人断除了痴,击破了黑暗之蕴”:那些圣弟子在预备阶段以暂时断除等方式,或者通过下下道断除了各个道所应断的痴,最终以最上道的金刚喻智击破了名为痴的黑暗聚集,彻底无余地断尽了。“他们不再流转”:这些阿拉汉——巴利
Natthaññoti ādikā gāthā vuttassa avuttassa ca atthassa saṅgaṇhanavasena bhāsitā. Tattha nivutāti nivāritā paliguṇṭhitā, paṭicchāditāti attho. Ahorattanti divā ceva rattiñca, sabbakālanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāmohena āvutāti yena pakārena avijjānīvaraṇasaṅkhātena mohena āvutā paṭicchāditā suviññeyyampi ajānantiyo pajā saṃsāre saṃsaranti, tathārūpo añño ekadhammopi ekanīvaraṇampi natthīti yojetabbaṃ. Ye ca mohaṃ pahantvāna, tamokhandhaṃ padālayunti ye pana ariyasāvakā pubbabhāge tadaṅgādippahānavasena, heṭṭhimamaggehi vā taṃtaṃmaggavajjhaṃ mohaṃ pajahitvā aggamaggena vajirūpamañāṇena mohasaṅkhātameva tamorāsiṃ padālayiṃsu, anavasesato samucchindiṃsu. Na te puna saṃsarantīti te arahanto –
诸蕴的次第,以及诸界与诸处的次第;
持续不断地运转,就被称为轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. –
听到这话时,他们不再在这个轮回里流转,也不再到处漂泊。为什么呢?因为他们没有轮回的因。轮回的因、根本原因就是无明,而他们没有这个无明,因为它已经被彻底断除,完全不存在了。巴利
Evaṃ vutte imasmiṃ saṃsāre na saṃsaranti na paribbhamanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Hetu tesaṃ na vijjati, yasmā saṃsārassa hetu mūlakāraṇaṃ avijjā, sā tesaṃ na vijjati, sabbaso natthi samucchinnattāti.
第五 爱结经注疏巴利
5. Ḍtaṇhāsaṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
15 15. 在第五经中,对于具有它的人,它通过苦、或通过业的果报、或通过有、生处、趣、识住、有情居,以及其他存在的差别等,把那个人连结起来,所以叫“结”。从渴求的意思来说叫“渴爱”:它自己渴求、自己遍求,或者众生依靠它而渴求,所以叫“渴爱”。“被连结的”:就是被系缚在眼等执着的所依处上。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解。在这里,虽然无明也有“结”的性质,渴爱也有“盖”的性质,这确实是有的,但为了显示这样一个特别的区别:无明以覆藏过患的方式存在,而渴爱则把众生连结到各种存在中——所以在前一部经里,无明以“盖”的性质来说,而在这里,渴爱只以“结”的性质来说。这也是为了显示盖和结各自的首要地位。正如以“盖”的性质来说,无明是诸杂染法中最主要、最先行者;同样,以“结”的性质来说,渴爱是它们中最主要者。为了显示这种依止于无明或渴爱的首要地位,在这两部经中,这些法才被这样分别宣说。再者,无明特别障碍涅槃之乐,所以叫“盖”;渴爱以轮回之苦把众生连结、束缚起来,所以叫“结”。巴利
15. Pañcame yassa vijjati, taṃ puggalaṃ dukkhehi, kammaṃ vā vipākehi, bhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāse vā bhavantarādīhi saṃyojetīti saṃyojanaṃ. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, tasati sayaṃ paritasati, tasanti vā etāyāti taṇhā. Saññuttāti cakkhādīsu abhinivesavatthūsu baddhā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha avijjāyapi saṃyojanabhāvo taṇhāya ca nīvaraṇabhāvo atthiyeva, tathāpi avijjāya paṭicchāditādīnavehi bhavehi taṇhā satte saṃyojetīti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ purimasutte avijjā nīvaraṇabhāvena, idha ca taṇhā saṃyojanabhāveneva vuttā. Kiñca nīvaraṇasaṃyojanappadhānassa dassanatthaṃ. Yathā hi nīvaraṇabhāvena avijjā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ padhānabhūtā pubbaṅgamā ca, evaṃ saṃyojanabhāvena nesaṃ taṇhāti tadadhīnappadhānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ suttadvaye evamete dhammā vuttā. Apica visesena avijjā nibbānasukhaṃ nivāretīti ‘‘nīvaraṇa’’nti vuttā, taṇhā saṃsāradukkhena satte saṃyojetīti ‘‘saṃyojana’’nti.
这二法之所以被分成两种来说,或者是因为它们会造成见道与修行的障碍,与明和行相违背。无明和明直接对立,尤其会障碍见到涅槃以及不颠倒的见;渴爱和行法直接对立,会障碍正确的修行道路。这样一来,这个没有听闻正法的凡夫,被无明覆盖而变得盲暗,被渴爱包围束缚,就像一个被绑住的盲人,无法越过轮回这片大旷野。也是为了显示无义之事生起的两种原因,这二法才被分成两种来说。陷入无明的人因为愚痴,会丧失利益,还会给自己造下无益之事,就像不擅治病的人做了不适合的事。即使他知道一些道理,如果因为愚痴,仍然会丧失利益、造作无益之事,就像知道病情的病人却服用不适合的药物。《猴胶喻经》就是用来证明这个道理的。巴利
Dassanagamanantarāyakaraṇato vā vijjācaraṇavipakkhato dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Vijjāya hi ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā avijjā nibbānadassanassa aviparītadassanassa ca visesato antarāyakarā, caraṇadhammānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā taṇhā gamanassa sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarāti; evamayaṃ avijjāya nivuto andhīkato taṇhāya saṃvuto baddho assutavā puthujjano andho viya baddho mahākantāraṃ, saṃsārakantāraṃ nātivattati. Anatthuppattihetudvayadassanatthampi dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Avijjāgato hi puggalo bālabhāvena atthaṃ parihāpeti, anatthañca attano karoti, akusalo viya āturo asappāyakiriyāya. Jānantopi bālo bālabhāvena atthaṃ parihāpeti, anatthañca karoti jānanto viya rogī asappāyasevī. Makkaṭālepopamasuttaṃ cetassa atthassa sādhakaṃ.
在这里,为了显示缘起的根本原因,这两者也被以两种方式来说明。特别是,因为迷惑的力量很强,无明所覆盖的范围是过去世;因为渴求的力量很强,爱所覆盖的范围是未来世。就像愚痴的人因为迷惑很多而追悔过去,对他来说,“无明缘行”等一整串都应该这样推导。渴求很多的人则不断盘算未来,对他来说,“爱缘取”等一整串也应该这样推导。因此应当知道,正是通过它们对前际的牵引、对后际的结生连接,这两者才依次显示了它们作为根本原因的性质。巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādassa mūlakāraṇadassanatthampettha dvayaṃ dvidhā vuttaṃ. Visesena hi sammohassa balavabhāvato avijjākhettaṃ atīto addhā, patthanāya balavabhāvato taṇhākhettaṃ anāgato addhā. Tathā hi bālajano sammohabahulo atītamanusocati, tassa avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti sabbaṃ netabbaṃ. Patthanābahulo anāgataṃ pajappati, tassa taṇhāpaccayā upādānantiādi sabbaṃ netabbaṃ. Teneva tāsaṃ pubbantāharaṇena aparantapaṭisandhānena cassa yathākkamaṃ mūlakāraṇatā dassitāti veditabbanti.
在偈颂中,“以渴爱为第二者”意思是“以渴爱为伴侣”。因为渴爱就像在无水的荒野中把阳焰误认为水一样,对被口渴逼迫、又被无法抵挡的痛苦逼迫的众生,通过展示享受滋味的方式,扮演伴侣的角色,让他们在诸有等处不生厌离,继续轮转。因此,渴爱被称为人的“第二者”。难道其他烦恼等就不是产生诸有的条件吗?确实也是,但它们并不像渴爱那样成为特别的条件。因为渴爱既能与不善法一起存在,也能离开不善法;既能离开欲界善法等,单独成为色界等善法产生诸有的特别条件,因此它被称为集圣谛。“如是性与异离性”:如是性和异离性合在一起,就是如是性异离。具有这种性质的就是如是性异离的轮回。其中,“如是性”指人的身份状态;“异离性”指此外其余有情居的状态。或者,各类有情现在的自体是如是性,未来的自体是异离性。又或者,任何这样形态的自体是如是性,不是这样形态的是异离性。他不能超越、不能越过这具有如是性与异离性的轮回,也就是蕴、界、处的相续序列。巴利
Gāthāsu taṇhādutiyoti taṇhāsahāyo. Taṇhā hi nirudakakantāre marīcikāya udakasaññā viya pipāsābhibhūtaṃ appaṭikāradukkhābhibhūtampi sattaṃ assādasandassanavasena sahāyakiccaṃ karontī bhavādīsu anibbindaṃ katvā paribbhamāpeti, tasmā taṇhā purisassa ‘‘dutiyā’’ti vuttā. Nanu ca aññepi kilesādayo bhavābhinibbattiyā paccayāva? Saccametaṃ, na pana tathā visesappaccayo yathā taṇhā. Tathā hi sā kusalehi vinā akusalehi, kāmāvacarādikusalehi ca vinā rūpāvacarādikusalehi bhavanibbattiyā visesappaccayo, yato samudayasaccanti vuccatīti. Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti itthabhāvo ca aññathābhāvo ca itthabhāvaññathābhāvo. So etassa atthīti itthabhāvaññathābhāvo saṃsāro, taṃ tattha itthabhāvo manussattaṃ, aññathābhāvo tato avasiṭṭhasattāvāsā. Itthabhāvo vā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppanno attabhāvo, aññathābhāvo anāgatattabhāvo. Evarūpo vā aññopi attabhāvo itthabhāvo, na evarūpo aññathābhāvo. Taṃ itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ saṃsāraṃ khandhadhātuāyatanapaṭipāṭiṃ nātivattati, na atikkamati.
了知这个过患之后,知道贪爱是苦的生起:意思是,了知贪爱——也就是这整个轮回之苦的生起、苦的集起——是过患,以过患的方式了知它。或者说,了知这个过患,就是了知前面所说的、不能超越轮回的这个过患和过失。知道贪爱是苦的生起,就是按前面说的方式,了知贪爱是轮回之苦的主要根源。离爱者无取,具念比丘游行:这样,通过三种遍知来了知,增长观智,依照道的次第断除贪爱。以最高的道彻底离爱、无爱;正因为对四种取中的任何一种都不执取,未来也不再有结生和执取,所以叫无取。因为正念达到圆满,一切处都能保持正念,所以叫具念。这位烦恼已断的比丘应当游行;或者说,他应当以五蕴般涅槃,从诸行的相续中脱离。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti etaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa sambhavaṃ samudayaṃ taṇhaṃ ādīnavaṃ ādīnavato ñatvāti attho. Atha vā etamādīnavaṃ ñatvāti etaṃ yathāvuttaṃ saṃsāranātivattanaṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ ñatvā. Taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti taṇhañca vuttanayena vaṭṭadukkhassa padhānakāraṇanti ñatvā. Vītataṇho anādāno, sato bhikkhu, paribbajeti evaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānanto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā taṇhaṃ vigamento aggamaggena sabbaso vītataṇho vigatataṇho, tato eva catūsu upādānesu kassacipi abhāvena āyatiṃ paṭisandhisaṅkhātassa vā ādānassa abhāvena anādāno, sativepullappattiyā sabbattha satokāritāya sato bhinnakileso bhikkhu paribbaje careyya, khandhaparinibbānena vā saṅkhārappavattito apagaccheyyāti attho.
第六 第一有学经的注释巴利
6. Paṭhamasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
16 在第六经中说到“有学”。这里,凭什么意义而称为“有学”?因为获得了有学的法,所以称为“有学”。这正如所说的:巴利
16. Chaṭṭhe sekhassāti ettha kenaṭṭhena sekho? Sekkhadhammapaṭilābhato sekho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
尊者,到底怎样才算是有学呢?比丘,在这里,他具备有学的正见……乃至具备有学的正定。比丘,达到这个程度就算是有学。巴利
‘‘Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sekho hotīti? Idha, bhikkhu, sekhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti…pe… sekhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, bhikkhu, sekho hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.13).
另外,因为是“在学习”,所以叫有学。这一点也有经文说过:巴利
Apica sikkhatīti sekho. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
比丘,因为他在学,所以称为有学。他学什么呢?他学增上戒,也学增上心,也学增上慧。比丘,因为他在学,所以称为有学。巴利
‘‘Sikkhatīti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā sekhoti vuccati. Kiñca sikkhati? Adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati. Sikkhatīti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā sekhoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.86).
即使是善凡夫,如果依照随顺之道圆满修行,具足戒行,守护根门,饮食知量,勤修警寤,在前夜后夜都致力于修习菩提分法,心里想着“今天或明天我就要证得某种沙门果”而安住——这个人也因为他还在学,所以被称为“有学”。在这个含义上,并不是只有已经证悟的人才是这里所说的有学,善凡夫也算。他还没有达到“心”,所以说“未达心”。“心”在这里:在“行于虚空的罗网,那意行的魔罗”这句中,指的是贪;在“心、意、识”这句中,指的是心;在“未达心的有学,在众人听闻中死去”这句中,指的是阿拉汉果。这里指的也是阿拉汉果。因此,这句话的意思就是“未证得阿拉汉果的人”。巴利
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomappaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati – ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekhoti. Imasmiṃ atthe na paṭivijjhantova sekho adhippeto, atha kho kalyāṇaputhujjanopi. Appattaṃ mānasaṃ etenāti appattamānaso. Mānasanti ‘‘antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33) ettha rāgo mānasanti vutto. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasa’’nti (dha. sa. 63, 65) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Appattamānaso sekho, kālaṃ kayirā jane sutā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.159) ettha arahattaṃ. Idhāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Tena appattaarahattassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“无上”是指最殊胜,“无可比拟”就是它的意思。“轭安稳”是指从四种轭中解脱而安稳、不受恼害,这里指的就是阿罗汉果。“对于希望者”有两种希望:渴爱的希望和善欲的希望。在“对于希望者,确有种种企求,对于所构想的事物也有颤栗”(《经集》908;《大义释》137)这句里,指的是渴爱的希望。巴利
Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ, asadisanti attho. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ anupaddutanti yogakkhemaṃ, arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Patthayamānassāti dve patthanā taṇhāpatthanā, kusalacchandapatthanā ca. ‘‘Patthayamānassa hi jappitāni, pavedhitaṃ vāpi pakappitesū’’ti (su. ni. 908; mahāni. 137) ettha taṇhāpatthanā.
已斩断魔罗的贪流,摧毁了它,把它彻底铲除干净;
比库们,你们要充满喜悦,要追求安稳。巴利
‘‘Chinnaṃ pāpimato sotaṃ, viddhastaṃ vinaḷīkataṃ; Pāmojjabahulā hotha, khemaṃ patthetha bhikkhavo’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.352);
在这里,想做的善欲和希求,正是这里所指的意思。所以“对希望者而言”的意思是:对于想要到达那轭安稳、心倾向于它、朝向它、以它为目标的人。“安住”是指:以另一种威仪中断一种威仪之苦,从而使身体不至于垮掉。或者,也可以按照“以信决定‘一切行都是无常’而安住”等解释方式来理解这里的含义。“内的”是指在自身、属于自己的内在之中存在的,也就是内。“支”是指原因。“这样做了之后”就是如此做了之后。“我不见其他任何一支”在这里的简要意思是:比丘们,将自身相续中内在生起的(如理作意)视为原因之后,我见不到还有其他任何一种原因能像如理作意这样带来如此广大的利益。所谓如理作意,就是方便作意、道作意、对无常等以无常等行相所作的作意,或者是随顺无常等的心转向、随转向、专注、摄取、作意。这就是如理作意。巴利
Ettha kattukamyatākusalacchandapatthanā, ayameva idhādhippetā. Tena patthayamānassāti taṃ yogakkhemaṃ gantukāmassa tanninnassa tappoṇassa tappabbhārassāti attho. Viharatoti ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harato. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti adhimuccanto saddhāya viharatī’’tiādinā niddesanayena cettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ajjhattikanti niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte ajjhatte bhavaṃ ajjhattikaṃ. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ. Iti karitvāti evaṃ katvā. Na aññaṃ ekaṅgampi samanupassāmīti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, ajjhattaṃ attano santāne samuṭṭhitaṃ kāraṇanti katvā aññaṃ ekakāraṇampi na samanupassāmi yaṃ evaṃ bahūpakāraṃ, yathayidaṃ yoniso manasikāroti upāyamanasikāro, pathamanasikāro, aniccādīsu aniccādinayeneva manasikāro, aniccānulomikena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro. Ayaṃ yoniso manasikāro.
现在,为了说明如理作意的威力,经中说:“比丘们,比丘如理作意时,就能舍断不善,修习善法。”其中,“如理作意”是指:在四圣谛上以如理的方式作意——“这是苦圣谛,这是苦集圣谛,这是苦灭圣谛,这是导向苦灭的道圣谛。”巴利
Idāni yoniso manasikārassa ānubhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yoniso, bhikkhave, bhikkhu manasi karonto akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yoniso manasi karontoti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhanirodho ariyasaccaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasacca’’nti catūsu ariyasaccesu yoniso manasikāraṃ pavattento.
这里对含义的阐明如下:虽然这部经是笼统地针对有学圣者而说的,但我们还是依四道共通的方式,简要地说明修行的所缘。那位以四圣谛为修行所缘的瑜伽行者,先前已经在老师面前学过四圣谛的修行所缘:“除渴爱之外的三界诸蕴是苦,渴爱是集,二者不再生起是灭,能证得灭的是道。”他后来登上观的道途,对三界诸蕴如理作意“这是苦”,以适当的方法和途径,既作意又观察。这里其实是以作意来指称观。对于那能引生苦的、来自前世的渴爱,他如理作意“这是苦集”。又因为此苦和此集到达这个状态就止息、不再生起,所以对那叫作涅槃的,他如理作意“这是苦灭”。对能证得灭的八支圣道,他如理作意“这是导向苦灭的道”,也就是以适当的方法和途径,作意并观察。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthavibhāvanā – yadipi idaṃ suttaṃ avisesena sekkhapuggalavasena āgataṃ, catumaggasādhāraṇavasena pana saṅkhepeneva kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathayissāma. Yo catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko yogāvacaro ‘‘taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakā khandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodho, nirodhasampāpako maggo’’ti evaṃ pubbe eva ācariyasantike uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhāno. So aparena samayena vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷho samāno tebhūmake khandhe ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca. Vipassanā hi idha manasikārasīsena vuttā. Yā panāyaṃ tassa dukkhassa samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavikā taṇhā, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti yoniso manasi karoti. Yasmā pana idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayañca samudayo idaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti na pavattanti, tasmā yadidaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma , ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti yoniso manasi karoti. Nirodhasampāpakaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca.
这里的方法是:所谓“执著”,是发生在诸蕴上,而不是发生在离转起上。所以这里的意思是:按照“在这个身体里有地界、水界……”(《长部》2.378)这样的方式,先把握四大种以及随四大种而来的所造色,然后确定“这是色蕴”。在这样确定的时候,对以那个色蕴为所缘而生起的心和心所法,确定“这四种是无色蕴”。接着再确定“这五蕴是苦”。不过,简要来说,它们分成名和色两部分。这个名色是有因、有缘才生起的,于是他确定它的因缘:无明、有、爱等是它的因,食等是它的缘。他确定了那些因以及由因所生之法的如实自性和特相之后,就安立无常相:“这些法原本没有而生成,生成之后又灭去,所以是无常”;安立苦相:“因为被生灭逼迫,所以是苦”;安立无我相:“因为不能自主控制,所以是无我”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upāyo – abhiniveso nāma khandhe hoti, na vivaṭṭe, tasmā ayamattho – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu, āpodhātū’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.378) nayena cattāri mahābhūtāni tadanusārena upādārūpāni ca pariggahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ rūpakkhandho’’ti vavatthapeti. Taṃ vavatthāpayato uppanne tadārammaṇe cittacetasikadhamme ‘‘ime cattāro arūpakkhandhā’’ti vavatthapeti. Tato ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā dukkha’’nti vavatthapeti. Te pana saṅkhepato nāmañca rūpañcāti dve bhāgā honti. Idañca nāmarūpaṃ sahetu sappaccayaṃ uppajjati, tassa ayaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādiko hetu, ayaṃ āhārādiko paccayoti hetuppaccaye vavatthapeti. So tesaṃ paccayānañca paccayuppannānañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘ime dhammā ahutvā bhavanti, hutvā nirujjhanti, tasmā aniccā’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, ‘‘udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā dukkhā’’ti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, ‘‘avasavattanato anattā’’ti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti.
这样把三相(无常、苦、无我)加上去之后,持续修观的人,当生灭智生起时,会生起光明等观染。他把这些观染判定为“这不是道”,而把生灭智本身判定为“圣道的助缘,是前分道”。这样分辨了道与非道之后,再依次让生灭智、坏灭智等生起,最终证得入流道等果位。就在那一刹那,他以一次通达就通达四圣谛,以一次现观就现观四谛。其中,他以遍知通达通达苦,以断除通达通达集,从而舍断一切不善法;以作证通达通达灭,以修习通达通达道,从而修习一切善法。因为圣道从究竟意义上说,以“应被鄙弃、应被舍断”等含义而称为善;而当这圣道被修习时,一切无过失的菩提分法也都达到修习圆满。这样如理作意的人,就能舍断不善法,修习善法。正如经中所说:“他如理作意‘这是苦’,如理作意‘这是苦集’……”(《中部》1.21)。另外还说:“比丘们,对于具足如理作意的比丘,可以预期:他将修习八支圣道,将多修习八支圣道。”(《相应部》5.55)巴利
Evaṃ tilakkhaṇāni āropetvā vipassanto udayabbayañāṇuppattiyā uppanne obhāsādike vipassanupakkilese ‘amaggo’ti udayabbayañāṇameva ‘‘ariyamaggassa upāyabhūto pubbabhāgamaggo’’ti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā puna udayabbayañāṇaṃ paṭipāṭiyā bhaṅgañāṇādīni ca uppādento sotāpattimaggādayo pāpuṇāti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri saccāni ekappaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Tattha dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto, samudayaṃ pahānappaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto sabbaṃ akusalaṃ pajahati, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhanto sabbaṃ kusalaṃ bhāveti. Ariyamaggo hi nippariyāyato kucchitasalanādiatthena kusalo, tasmiñca bhāvite sabbepi kusalā anavajjabodhipakkhiyadhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti. Evaṃ yoniso manasi karonto akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karoti, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.21). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘yoniso manasikārasampannassetaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ – ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.55).
“如理作意”这句偈颂的简要含义是:正在学习的人,拥有诸学处,或者以学习为戒行,所以叫“有学”。在轮回中看到怖畏,所以叫“比丘”。对于这样的有学比丘,为了证达最上之义——阿罗汉果,再也没有别的法能像如理作意这样有大作用、大利益。为什么呢?因为以如理作意为先导,依四种正勤而精进努力,就能达到苦的灭尽,也就是杂染流转之苦的彻底灭尽、最终抵达涅槃,所以如理作意有大作用。巴利
Yonisomanasikāroti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – sikkhati, sikkhāpadāni tassa atthi, sikkhanasīloti vā sekho. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Tassa sekhassa bhikkhuno uttamatthassa arahattassa pattiyā adhigamāya yathā yoniso manasikāro, evaṃ bahukāro bahūpakāro añño koci dhammo natthi. Kasmā? Yasmā yoniso upāyena manasikāraṃ purakkhatvā padahaṃ catubbidhasammappadhānavasena padahanto, khayaṃ dukkhassa pāpuṇe saṃkilesavaṭṭadukkhassa parikkhayaṃ pariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇe adhigaccheyya, tasmā yoniso manasikāro bahukāroti.
第十部《第二有学经》的注释巴利
7. Dutiyasekhasuttavaṇṇanā
17 第七经中,“外”是指存在于自身相续之外。“善知识性”是指:一个人具备戒等功德,能断除不善,能带来利益,并且以各种方式帮助他人,这样的人就是善知识;他具有善知识的这种状态,就叫善知识性。这里所说的善知识,本性上具备信、戒、闻、施、精进、念、定、慧。其中,因为具备信,他深信如来的菩提,因此不放弃作为正觉之因的、为众生求利益安乐的努力;因为具备戒,他受到同梵行者的喜爱、敬重、尊重,是劝诫者、呵责恶行的人、教导者,并且能接受别人的话;因为具备闻,他能宣说关于蕴、处、谛、缘起等甚深之法;因为具备施,他少欲、知足、远离、不与人混杂;因为具备精进,他在利益自己和他人方面都发起精进;因为具备念,他正念现前,具备最上的念与正知,对很久以前做过的事、说过的话都能忆念、回忆;因为具备定,他不散乱,心得定,心一境性;因为具备慧,他无颠倒地了知。他以念探寻善法与不善法的去向,以慧如实了知众生的利益与安乐,以定使心在其中不散乱,以精进制止众生走向不利,引导他们投入纯粹的利益。因此说——巴利
17. Sattame bāhiranti ajjhattasantānato bahi bhavaṃ. Kalyāṇamittatāti yassa sīlādiguṇasampanno aghassa ghātā , hitassa vidhātā sabbākārena upakārako mitto hoti, so puggalo kalyāṇamitto, tassa bhāvo kalyāṇamittatā. Tatrāyaṃ kalyāṇamitto pakatiyā saddhāsampanno hoti sīlasampanno sutasampanno cāgasampanno vīriyasampanno satisampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṃ, tena sammāsambodhihetubhūtaṃ sattesu hitasukhesitaṃ na pariccajati, sīlasampattiyā sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti garu ca bhāvanīyo codako pāpagarahī vattā vacanakkhamo, sutasampattiyā khandhāyatanasaccapaṭiccasamuppādādikānaṃ gambhīrānaṃ kathānaṃ kattā hoti, cāgasampattiyā appiccho hoti santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho, vīriyasampattiyā attano paresañca hitappaṭipattiyaṃ āraddhavīriyo hoti, satisampattiyā upaṭṭhitassati hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā, samādhisampattiyā avikkhitto hoti samāhito ekaggacitto, paññāsampattiyā aviparītaṃ pajānāti. So satiyā kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesanto paññāya sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā samādhinā tattha abyaggacitto hutvā vīriyena satte ahitato nisedhetvā ekantahite niyojeti. Tenevāha –
可爱、可敬、值得尊重,是劝诫者,也能接受别人的话。
能作甚深之论说,而不于不适当之处驱使人随行。巴利
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no cāṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti. (netti. 113);
比丘们,一位比丘因为有善友,就能舍断不善、修习善法。也就是说,一个人因为有善友,依止善知识,就会生起“业由自己所作”的智见,并使已经生起的信心增长。由于信心的生起,他就前去亲近善知识;亲近之后,就听闻正法。听闻该法之后,他对如来获得信心。由于获得这份信心,他就舍弃在家生活,出家修行,成就四种清净的戒,随自己的能力受持头陀功德并实践,成为具足十种论说的人。他发起精进,安住其中,正念现前,具足正知,在前夜和后夜都致力于修习和实践菩提分法。不久之后,他就使观智成熟,依靠证得圣道,彻底断除一切不善,也使一切善法通过修习达到圆满而不断增长。正如经中所说:巴利
Kalyāṇamitto, bhikkhave, bhikkhu akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetīti kalyāṇamitto puggalo kalyāṇamittaṃ nissāya kammassakatāñāṇaṃ uppādeti, uppannaṃ saddhaṃ phātiṃ karoti, saddhājāto upasaṅkamati upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ suṇāti. Taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhati, tena saddhāpaṭilābhena gharāvāsaṃ pahāya pabbajjaṃ anutiṭṭhati, catupārisuddhisīlaṃ sampādeti, yathābalaṃ dhutadhamme samādāya vattati, dasakathāvatthulābhī hoti, āraddhavīriyo viharati upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto, nacirasseva vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggādhigamena sabbaṃ akusalaṃ samucchindati, sabbañca kusalaṃ bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gamento vaḍḍheti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
弥醯,对于有善友、有善同伴、有善交往的比丘来说,可以期望的是:他会成为具戒的人,安住在巴帝摩卡的防护中,行为和行处都具足,对极微小的过失也看到危险,受持学处而学习。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ, meghiya, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ kalyāṇasahāyassa kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ sīlavā bhavissati, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharissati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu, bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhissati, sikkhāpadesu’.
对于有善友……中略……有善谈之友者来说,可以预期:凡是那种能削减烦恼、适合打开心扉、纯一导向厌离……中略……导向涅槃的谈话,也就是:少欲论、知足论、远离论、不杂处论、发勤精进论、戒论、定论……中略……解脱智见论。对于这样的谈话,他将成为易得者、无困难而得、不费力而得。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ…pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ yāyaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovivaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ – appicchakathā, santuṭṭhikathā, pavivekakathā, asaṃsaggakathā, vīriyārambhakathā, sīlakathā, samādhikathā…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanakathā. Evarūpāya kathāya nikāmalābhī bhavissati akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’.
这是善友……中略……善于结交善友者的情形:他将以已发起的精进安住,为了断除不善法、获得善法,勇猛有力、坚定精勤,在诸善法上不放弃责任。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ …pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ āraddhavīriyo viharissati akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāya thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu’.
这是善友……乃至……与善友相交者的特质:他将成为有慧的人,具备那能观见生灭、圣洁、洞穿烦恼、正确导向苦之灭尽的智慧。巴利
‘‘Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ…pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa ‘yaṃ paññavā bhavissati, udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā’’’ti (udā. 31).
应当这样理解:善友关系就是整个轮回之苦中解脱出来的标志。因此世尊说:巴利
Evaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhaparimuccananimittaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha –
阿难,众生依止我这个善知识,有生法的众生就能从生中解脱;有老法的众生就能从老中解脱。巴利
‘‘Mamañhi , ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccanti, jarādhammā sattā jarāya parimuccantī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.129).
因此世尊这样说:比丘们,一位有善友的比丘,会舍断不善,修习善法。巴利
Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘kalyāṇamitto, bhikkhave, bhikkhu akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetī’’ti.
在偈颂中,“有承诺者”(sappatisso):与以承诺之义而得名的承诺一起,就是有承诺者;意思是把善友的教导顶在头上接受、顺从教导的人。或者,“patisso”是通过安立他人于利益与安乐而给予教诫,即给予教诫的人。以尊重与恭敬相应,与这样的patissa共住,就是“有承诺者”,即对值得尊重的人多起尊重之心与恭敬之心。“具恭敬”:具备六种恭敬。“奉行善友的话”:践行善友们的教导,依照教导而行。“具正知”:具备依七处而起的正知。“具念”:以能够使业处增长成就的念而具念、随念而行。“次第地”:依照戒清净等清净的次第,以及其中观的次第和道的次第。“一切结尽”:由于断除欲贪结等一切结,而称为“一切结尽”的圣道的终点——阿罗汉果,或者作为其所缘的涅槃本身。应达到、应获得。如此,在这两部经中,应当知道世尊把圣道证得的主要支分称为精勤支。巴利
Gāthāya sappatissoti patissavasaṅkhātena saha patissenāti sappatisso, kalyāṇamittassa ovādaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchako subbacoti attho. Atha vā hitasukhe patiṭṭhāpanena pati isetīti patisso, ovādadāyako. Garuādarayogena tena patissena saha vattatīti sappatisso, garūsu garucittīkārabahulo. Sagāravoti chabbidhenapi gāravena yutto. Karaṃ mittānaṃ vacananti kalyāṇamittānaṃ ovādaṃ karonto yathovādaṃ paṭipajjanto. Sampajānoti sattaṭṭhāniyena sampajaññena samannāgato. Patissatoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ , gametuṃ samatthāya satiyā patissato satokārī. Anupubbenāti sīlādivisuddhipaṭipāṭiyā, tattha ca vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ceva maggapaṭipāṭiyā ca. Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayanti kāmarāgasaṃyojanādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khepanato sabbasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa pariyosānabhūtaṃ arahattaṃ, tassa ārammaṇabhūtaṃ nibbānameva vā. Pāpuṇe adhigaccheyyāti attho. Iti imesu dvīsu suttesu ariyamaggādhigamassa satthārā padhānaṅgaṃ nāma gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
第八 破僧经的注释巴利
8. Saṅghabhedasuttavaṇṇanā
18 在第八经里说的“一法”,是指哪种经文的安排方式呢?是依事缘而起的。这里简略地说一下来龙去脉——提婆达多先让阿阇世执持恶见,又借阿阇世之手杀害了他的父亲频婆娑罗王,还派刺客去行刺,又推石头砸伤佛陀、造下出佛身血的恶业。可是做了这些,他还没有因此臭名远扬;直到放出那罗祇梨象之后,他才声名狼藉。于是大众议论纷纷,吵嚷起来:“国王竟然跟这样的人混在一起,还到处走动!”声音闹得很大。国王听到这些议论后,就中断了原本供养的五百锅饭食,也不再来亲近侍奉。城里的人家,即使他上门托钵,连一勺饭也不肯给。提婆达多失去了利养和恭敬,想靠装模作样活下去,就来到世尊面前,乞求那五件事。世尊用“够了,提婆达多,谁想要就让他去做林野住者吧”等话拒绝了他。他就用这五件事去说服那些愚笨、偏爱粗劣苦行的人,让五百名跋耆族比丘取筹表决,破了僧团之后,带着他们去了象头山。那时,两位上首弟子遵照世尊的吩咐,到那里去说法,使那些比丘安立于圣果,然后把他们带了回来。至于那些在提婆达多图谋破僧时,认可他的主张、也同样坚持拥护,在僧团分裂和已经分裂时都表示赞同的人,这给他们带来了长久的损害和痛苦。巴利
18. Aṭṭhame ekadhammoti kataroyaṃ suttanikkhepo? Aṭṭhuppattiko. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā – devadatto hi ajātasattuṃ duggahaṇaṃ gāhāpetvā tassa pitaraṃ rājānaṃ bimbisāraṃ tena mārāpetvāpi abhimāre payojetvāpi silāpavijjhanena lohituppādakammaṃ katvāpi na tāvatā pākaṭo jāto, nāḷāgiriṃ vissajjetvā pana pākaṭo jāto. Atha mahājano ‘‘evarūpampi nāma pāpaṃ gahetvā rājā vicaratī’’ti kolāhalaṃ akāsi, mahāghoso ahosi. Taṃ sutvā rājā attanā dīyamānāni pañca thālipākasatāni pacchindāpesi, upaṭṭhānampissa nāgamāsi. Nāgarāpi kulaṃ upagatassa kaṭacchubhattampissa nādaṃsu. So parihīnalābhasakkāro kohaññena jīvitukāmo satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañca vatthūni yācitvā ‘‘alaṃ, devadatta, yo icchati, so āraññiko hotū’’tiādinā (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) bhagavatā paṭikkhitto tehi pañcahi vatthūhi bālaṃ lūkhappasannaṃ janaṃ saññāpento pañcasate vajjiputtake salākaṃ gāhāpetvā saṅghaṃ bhinditvāva te ādāya gayāsīsaṃ agamāsi. Atha dve aggasāvakā satthu āṇāya tattha gantvā dhammaṃ desetvā te ariyaphale patiṭṭhāpetvā ānayiṃsu. Ye panassa saṅghabhedāya parakkamantassa laddhiṃ rocetvā tatheva paggayha ṭhitā saṅghe bhijjante bhinne ca samanuññā ahesuṃ, tesaṃ taṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya ahosi .
提婆达多没过多久也身患重病,病势沉重,临命终时说:“我要礼敬世尊。”于是被人用床轿抬着前往,在祇园池塘边被放下时,大地裂开,他坠落下去,投生到阿鼻地狱。他的身体有一百由旬那么大,要在那里停留一劫,被粗如棕榈树干的铁桩穿透。追随提婆达多见解的约五百家族,也安住于那种见解,连同他们的眷属一起投生到了地狱。有一天,比丘们在法堂里议论说:“贤友们,提婆达多破坏僧团,造下了极重的业。”这时,世尊来到法堂,问道:“比丘们,你们现在聚在这里谈论什么?”当他们回答说“在谈这件事”后,世尊为了显示破僧的过患,宣说了这部经。不过也有人这样说:“世尊是看到提婆达多及其同党就这样投生到地狱,出于自己的意愿,为了显示破僧的过患,才宣说了这部经。”巴利
Devadattopi na cirasseva rogābhibhūto bāḷhagilāno maraṇakāle ‘‘satthāraṃ vandissāmī’’ti mañcakasivikāya nīyamāno jetavanapokkharaṇitīre ṭhapito pathaviyā vivare dinne patitvā avīcimhi nibbatti, yojanasatiko cassa attabhāvo ahosi kappaṭṭhiyo tālakkhandhaparimāṇehi ayasūlehi vinividdho. Devadattapakkhikāni ca pañcamattāni kulasatāni tassa laddhiyaṃ ṭhitāni saha bandhavehi niraye nibbattāni. Ekadivasaṃ bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, devadattena saṅghaṃ bhindantena bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ kata’’nti. Atha satthā dhammasabhaṃ upagantvā ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘imāya nāmā’’ti vutte saṅghabhede ādīnavaṃ dassento imaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi. Keci pana bhaṇanti ‘‘devadattassa tappakkhikānañca tathā niraye nibbattabhāvaṃ disvā saṅghabhede ādīnavaṃ dassento bhagavā attano ajjhāsayeneva imaṃ suttaṃ desesī’’ti.
在这里,“一法”是指一种不善的、罪过很大的法。“世间”是指有情世间。“生起时便生起”这句话是说:当那些会导致分裂的争吵等事在僧团中发生,有人为了说明“这是法,这是非法”等十八种破僧事中的任何一种,或者为了让人产生认同而加以劝告,甚至在劝告之后让大家取了筹,这时破僧就叫做正在生起;但是,取了筹之后,当四个人或更多人另外进行诵戒或僧团羯磨时,那时破僧才叫做已经生起。那么,破僧在什么情况下叫做已生呢?羯磨、诵戒、说明、劝告、取筹——在这五种导致僧团分裂的原因中,羯磨或诵戒才是判定标准,而说明、劝告、取筹则是之前的前方便。巴利
Tattha ekadhammoti eko akusalo mahāsāvajjadhammo. Loketi sattaloke. Uppajjamāno uppajjatīti ettha bhedasaṃvattanikesu bhaṇḍanādīsu saṅghe uppannesupi ‘‘dhammo adhammo’’tiādīsu aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūsu yassa kassaci dīpanavasena voharantesupi tattha rucijananatthaṃ anussāventesupi anussāvetvā salākāya gāhitāyapi saṅghabhedo uppajjamāno nāma hoti, salākāya pana gāhitāya cattāro vā atirekā vā yadā āveṇikaṃ uddesaṃ vā saṅghakammaṃ vā karonti, tadā saṅghabhedo uppajjati nāma. Kate pana tasmiṃ saṅghabhedo uppanno nāma? Kammaṃ, uddeso, vohāro, anussāvanā, salākaggāhoti imesu hi pañcasu saṅghassa bhedakāraṇesu kammaṃ vā uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhā pana pubbabhāgāti.
在“对众多人不利”等说法中:因为阻碍大众获得禅那、道等成就,所以是“不利”;因为阻碍投生天界,所以是“不乐”;因为成为堕入恶趣的原因,所以是“无益”。或者,从不善法的角度来说,是“不利”;由于连一点点真实的利益都没有,即使投生在善趣,也会生起身苦和心苦,所以是“苦”——这就是句子的关联。“诸天与人”:这是在“众多人”当中,指出那些最殊胜的人。另一种解释方式:“对众多人不利”,就是对广大的众生群体不利,意思是对现世的利益和来世的利益都没有好处。“不乐”,就是对现世的安乐和来世的安乐都没有好处,意思是两种苦。“无益”,就是对究竟意义的否定。因为涅槃就是究竟意义,在它之上再没有别的意义了。“不利”,就是对道的否定。因为除了能证得涅槃的道之外,再没有更高的利益了。“苦”,是因为远离了圣者的快乐,所以是轮回的苦。那些远离圣者之乐、没有能力证得它的人,就在轮回的苦中流转,而除了圣者之乐以外,再没有更高的快乐了。确实这样说过:“这种定是现法乐住,而且能带来未来的乐报。”巴利
Bahujanāhitāyātiādīsu 0.mahājanassa jhānamaggādisampattinivāraṇena ahitāya, saggasampattinivāraṇena asukhāya, apāyūpapattihetubhāvena anatthāya. Akusaladhammavasena vā ahitāya, hitamattassapi abhāvā sugatiyampi nibbattanakakāyikacetasikadukkhāya uppajjatīti sambandho . Devamanussānanti idaṃ ‘‘bahuno janassā’’ti vuttesu ukkaṭṭhapuggalaniddeso. Aparo nayo – bahujanāhitāyāti bahujanassa mahato sattakāyassa ahitatthāya, diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthāyāti attho. Asukhāyāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaasukhatthāya, duvidhadukkhatthāyāti attho. Anatthāyāti paramatthapaṭikkhepāya. Nibbānañhi paramattho, tato uttariṃ attho natthi. Ahitāyāti maggapaṭikkhepāya. Nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttariṃ hitaṃ nāma natthi. Dukkhāyāti ariyasukhavirādhanena vaṭṭadukkhatāya. Ye hi ariyasukhato viraddhā taṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā, te vaṭṭadukkhe paribbhamanti, ariyasukhato ca uttariṃ sukhaṃ nāma natthi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27).
现在,为了直接说明“破僧”本身是什么样子,并显示它完全是不利等的根本原因,世尊说:“比丘们,当僧团分裂时……”等等。其中,“分裂时”是处格,表示原因,就像“对没有财物的人,在财物不被给予时”这种说法一样,意思是“以分裂为原因”。“互相争吵”,是指四众弟子以及各自的支持者之间,以“这是法,这不是法”的方式互相争辩。争吵是口角的前奏。“辱骂”,是指用“我们要这样那样害你们”来制造恐惧、进行威胁。“周遍讥毁”,是指从出身等方面全面贬损,也就是用十种骂人的事来嘲笑、贬低对方。“彻底舍弃”,是指通过驱摈羯磨等方式把人逐出僧团。“在那里”,是指在那个僧团分裂中,或者在以分裂为因的争吵等事中。“原本未净信者”,是指不了知三宝功德的人。“不净信”,是指对于“这些比丘是法行者、正行者”这类能让人们对僧团生起净信的方式,他们不再生起净信,也不觉得他们的话值得听、值得信。这样一来,他们对法和世尊也变成未净信了。“某些人的变异”,是指那些信心尚未坚固增长的凡夫,其净信发生了变化。巴利
Idāni ‘‘saṅghabhedo’’ti sarūpato dassetvā tassa ahitādīnaṃ ekantahetubhāvaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘saṅghe kho pana, bhikkhave, bhinne’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhinneti nimittatthe bhummaṃ yathā ‘‘adhanānaṃ dhane ananuppadīyamāne’’ti (dī. ni. 3.91), bhedahetūti attho. Aññamaññaṃ bhaṇḍanānīti catunnaṃ parisānaṃ tappakkhikānañca ‘‘eso dhammo, neso dhammo’’ti aññamaññaṃ vivadanāni. Bhaṇḍanañhi kalahassa pubbabhāgo. Paribhāsāti ‘‘idañcidañca vo anatthaṃ karissāmā’’ti bhayuppādanavasena tajjanā. Parikkhepāti jātiādivasena parito khepā, dasahi akkosavatthūhi khuṃsanavambhanā. Pariccajanāti ukkhepaniyakammakaraṇādivasena nissāraṇā. Tatthāti tasmiṃ saṅghabhede, tannimitte vā bhaṇḍanādike. Appasannāti ratanattayaguṇānaṃ anabhiññā. Na pasīdantīti ‘‘dhammacārino samacārino’’tiādinā yvāyaṃ bhikkhūsu pasādanākāro, tathā na pasīdanti, tesaṃ vā sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ na maññanti. Tathā ca dhamme satthari ca appasannāva honti. Ekaccānaṃ aññathattanti puthujjanānaṃ aviruḷhasaddhānaṃ pasādaññathattaṃ.
在偈颂中,“堕恶趣者”等词是这样理解的:因为具有投生到恶趣的性质,所以叫“堕恶趣者”。在那里,他将投生于被称为阿鼻的大地狱,所以叫“地狱者”。在那里完整地住满一个中劫,所以叫“劫住者”。乐于被称为“破僧”的朋党,所以叫“乐于朋党者”。因为不如法,所以是“非法”。又因为安住于由破僧事所构成的这种非法之中,所以叫“住于非法者”。“从轭安稳中毁坏”:就是从安稳的利乐中毁坏、退失;或者说,由于不被四种轭所侵扰,阿拉汉果和涅槃被称为“轭安稳”,若说从那里面毁坏,那下场就更不必说了。依戒与见一致的意义而和合,所以叫僧团;也正是由于这个原因,通过同一羯磨等行为而结合,称为和合。“已破”:以先前所说的那种破僧方式分裂之后。“一劫”:指寿命的一劫,而这里指的是一个中劫。“于地狱”:指在阿鼻大地狱中。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ āpāyikotiādīsu apāye nibbattanārahatāya āpāyiko. Tatthapi avīcisaṅkhāte mahāniraye uppajjatīti nerayiko. Ekaṃ antarakappaṃ paripuṇṇameva katvā tattha tiṭṭhatīti kappaṭṭho. Saṅghabhedasaṅkhāte vagge ratoti vaggarato. Adhammiyatāya adhammo. Bhedakaravatthūhi saṅghabhedasaṅkhāte eva ca adhamme ṭhitoti adhammaṭṭho. Yogakkhemā padhaṃsatīti yogakkhemato hitato padhaṃsati parihāyati, catūhi vā yogehi anupaddutattā yogakkhemaṃ nāma arahattaṃ nibbānañca, tato panassa dhaṃsane vattabbameva natthi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññato saṃhataṭṭhena saṅghaṃ, tato eva ekakammādividhānayogena samaggaṃ sahitaṃ. Bhetvānāti pubbe vuttalakkhaṇena saṅghabhedena bhinditvā. Kappanti āyukappaṃ. So panettha antarakappova. Nirayamhīti avīcimahānirayamhi.
9. 僧团和合经的注释巴利
9. Saṅghasāmaggīsuttavaṇṇanā
19 在第九经里,“一法”就是指一种善的、没有过失的法。如果僧团里出现“这是法,这不是法”之类的争论,那么一个真正爱法、有智慧的人就该这样想:“确实有可能出现这种情况:争论不断扩大的话,会导致僧团不和,甚至导致僧团分裂。”如果那件争端是自己挑起来的,就该像踩到火一样,赶紧从里面退出来。如果是别人挑起来的,而自己有能力把它平息,那就该振作起来,哪怕要走很远的路,也要想办法让那件争端平息下去。如果自己没能力平息,而那场争论又一再升级、始终停不下来,那就该去鼓励当地那些品行端正、乐于修学的同梵行者,让大家依据法、依据律、依据导师的教导,把那件争端妥善平息下来。能这样平息争端、促成僧团和合的善法,就是这里所说的“一法”。因为这种法能去掉那些对陷入犹豫纠结的双方比丘、随顺他们的比丘尼、男居士、女居士,乃至守护他们的天神,直到梵天,可能产生的不利、痛苦和杂染;又因为它能成为广大福德聚积和善果相续的因,所以能给包括天人在内的世间带来利益和安乐。因此经文说:“比丘们,有一法出现在世间时,是为了众多人的利益……”等等。这段的意思,可以参照紧接着的那部经,反过来理解。僧团和合,就是指僧团处于和合的状态,没有分裂,共同做同一件事,共同诵同一部戒本。巴利
19. Navame ekadhammoti eko kusaladhammo anavajjadhammo. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā sace saṅghe vivādo uppajjeyya, tattha dhammakāmena viññunā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho, panetaṃ vijjati, yadidaṃ vivādo vaḍḍhamāno saṅgharājiyā vā saṅghabhedāya vā saṃvatteyyā’’ti. Sace taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ attanā paggahetvā ṭhito, aggiṃ akkantena viya sahasā tato oramitabbaṃ. Atha parehi taṃ paggahitaṃ sayañcetaṃ sakkoti vūpasametuṃ, ussāhajāto hutvā dūrampi gantvā tathā paṭipajjitabbaṃ, yathā taṃ vūpasammati. Sace pana sayaṃ na sakkoti, so ca vivādo uparūpari vaḍḍhateva, na vūpasammati. Ye tattha patirūpā sikkhākāmā sabrahmacārino, te ussāhetvā yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ yathā vūpasammati, tathā vūpasametabbaṃ. Evaṃ vūpasamentassa yo saṅghasāmaggikaro kusalo dhammo, ayamettha ekadhammoti adhippeto. So hi ubhatopakkhiyānaṃ dveḷhakajātānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, tesaṃ anuvattanavasena ṭhitānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ upāsakānaṃ upāsikānaṃ tesaṃ ārakkhadevatānaṃ yāvadeva brahmānampi uppajjanārahaṃ ahitaṃ dukkhāvahaṃ saṃkilesadhammaṃ apanetvā mahato puññarāsissa kusalābhisandassa hetubhāvato sadevakassa lokassa hitasukhāvaho hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekadhammo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāyā’’tiādi. Tassattho anantarasutte vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Saṅghasāmaggīti saṅghassa samaggabhāvo bhedābhāvo ekakammatā ekuddesatā ca.
偈颂里说“僧团和合是乐”,因为和合是乐的因缘条件,所以说和合是乐。就像“诸佛出世是乐”(《法句》194)那样。“对和合者的护持”,意思是透过随喜和合来护持那些和合的人,这是与和合相应的护持。意思是:为了让他们不舍弃和合,而如此接纳他们、安立他们、给予他们助力。“使僧团和合后”:是指把已经分裂或出现裂痕的僧团,重新变得和谐、和合。“一劫”:就是指整整一寿命劫那么长。“在天界享乐”:是指在欲界天中,以十种方式胜过其他天人,享受天界的快乐;因为所想要的一切都能实现,所以他欢喜、喜悦、自在、嬉戏。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggīti sukhassa paccayabhāvato sāmaggī sukhāti vuttā. Yathā ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo’’ti (dha. pa. 194). Samaggānañcanuggahoti samaggānaṃ sāmaggianumodanena anuggaṇhanaṃ sāmaggianurūpaṃ, yathā te sāmaggiṃ na vijahanti, tathā gahaṇaṃ ṭhapanaṃ anubalappadānanti attho. Saṅghaṃ samaggaṃ katvānāti bhinnaṃ saṅghaṃ rājipattaṃ vā samaggaṃ sahitaṃ katvā. Kappanti āyukappameva. Saggamhi modatīti kāmāvacaradevaloke aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi abhibhavitvā dibbasukhaṃ anubhavanto icchitanipphattiyāva modati pamodati lalati kīḷatīti.
第10篇 恶心经的注释巴利
10. Paduṭṭhacittasuttavaṇṇanā
20 第十经的起因是什么?就是这件事的起因。据说有一天,比丘们聚集在法堂里,谈起了这样一个话题:“贤友们,这里有人做了很多福德善业,有人做了很多恶业,还有人善恶业夹杂着做。那么,那些善恶夹杂而做的人,来世会怎样呢?”这时,导师来到法堂,坐在早已铺好的殊胜佛座上,听到这番谈论后,为了说明“比丘们,临终的时候,如果心被染污,就可以预料他会投生到恶趣”,便以这件事为因缘,开示了这部经。巴利
20. Dasamassa kā uppatti? Aṭṭhuppattiyeva. Ekadivasaṃ kira bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ sannisinnā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘āvuso, idhekacco bahuṃ puññakammaṃ karoti, ekacco bahuṃ pāpakammaṃ, ekacco ubhayavomissakaṃ karoti. Tattha vomissakārino kīdiso abhisamparāyo’’ti? Atha satthā dhammasabhaṃ upaganvā paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno taṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘bhikkhave, maraṇāsannakāle saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa duggati pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti dassento imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ desesi.
在这里,“在此”是一个表示地点或指示的不变词。它有时是就某个地点来说的,比如“正站在此处,我已成天人”等。有时是就教法来说的,比如“比丘们,正是在此教法中,有真正的沙门,有第二位沙门”等。有时只是为了补足句子,比如“比丘们,在此,我已吃饱,已经满足”等。有时是就世间来说的,比如“此处,如来出现于世间”等。在这里,也应该理解为是就世间来说。“某位”的意思是一个、某一人。“补特伽罗”就是指众生。因为他随着各种条件被善业、不善业以及它们的果报所充满,又因为死亡而消逝,所以称为补特伽罗。“心败坏者”:指因为嗔恚、愤恨而心变得败坏;或者指被贪、嗔等烦恼所污染的心。在这里,“某位”这个词是用来修饰“心败坏的补特伽罗”的。这是针对结生业已经获得成熟机会的人而说的。也就是说,对于这种人,已经没办法把心从不善心的运作中收回来、转向善心,这就是临终的人。“如此”:现在显示将要说的情形。“以心”:以自己的心,也就是以他心通智。“心”:指那个人的心。“遍知”:辨别之后了知。难道这不是随着业趣智的领域吗?确实如此,但这里是就不善心正在生起的情况而说的。巴利
Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci padesaṃ upādāya vuccati ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369). Katthaci sāsanaṃ upādāya ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo idha dutiyo samaṇo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci padapūraṇamatte ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30). Katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.61). Idhāpi loke eva daṭṭhabbo. Ekaccanti ekaṃ, aññataranti attho. Puggalanti sattaṃ. So hi yathāpaccayaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ tabbipākānañca pūraṇato maraṇavasena galanato ca puggaloti vuccati. Paduṭṭhacittanti padosena āghātena duṭṭhacittaṃ. Atha vā paduṭṭhacittanti dosena rāgādinā padūsitacittaṃ. Ettha ca ekaccanti idaṃ paduṭṭhacittassa puggalassa visesanaṃ. Yassa hi paṭisandhidāyakakammaṃ okāsamakāsi, so tathā vutto. Yassa ca akusalappavattito cittaṃ nivattetvā kusalavasena otāretuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ āsannamaraṇo. Evanti idāni vattabbākāraṃ dasseti. Cetasāti attano cittena cetopariyañāṇena. Cetoti tassa puggalassa cittaṃ. Pariccāti paricchinditvā pajānāmi. Nanu ca yathākammupagañāṇassāyaṃ visayoti? Saccametaṃ, tadā pavattamānaakusalacittavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
这就是它的含义:在这个时间,或者在这因缘和合的条件下,这个人会在速行心路过程的最后阶段死去。因为在速行心生起的那一刹那,是不可能发生死亡的。如同被带来的东西放置在那里,就那样堕入地狱:意思是,就像把带来的什么东西随手一放那样,他完全被自己的业力投进地狱,就那样被安置在地狱里了。身体瓦解之后:指舍弃了被执取的五蕴集合体之后。死后:指在紧接着的下一刹那,执取新受生的五蕴集合体之时。或者,身体瓦解是指命根断绝;死后是指从死亡那一刻之后。巴利
Imamhicāyaṃ samayeti imasmiṃ kāle, imāyaṃ vā paccayasāmaggiyaṃ, ayaṃ puggalo javanavīthiyā aparabhāge kālaṃ kareyya ceti attho. Na hi javanakkhaṇe kālaṃkiriyā atthi. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā ābhataṃ kiñci āharitvā ṭhapitaṃ, evaṃ attano kammunā nikkhitto niraye ṭhapito evāti attho. Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ.
“恶趣”等词全都是地狱的别名。地狱之所以叫“恶趣”,是因为它远离了被称为“乐”的东西;或者说,它远离了那些被视为福德的善法——那些善法是生天和解脱的因,所以叫“恶趣”。所谓“苦趣”,就是苦的去处、苦的依靠之处;或者说,因为嗔恨心特别多,由染污的业所生出的趣,也叫“苦趣”。所谓“陷堕”,就是造了恶业的人不由自主地掉进这里;或者说,身体四肢百骸崩坏破碎而坠落此处,所以叫“陷堕”。所谓“地狱”,是因为这里没有被称为“乐味”的东西,从没有乐味这个意义上说,就叫“地狱”。另外,单提“恶趣”这个词时,指的是畜生道。因为畜生道远离了善趣,所以是“恶趣”;但它不算“苦趣”,因为其中有龙王等大威力的众生存在。单提“苦趣”这个词时,指的是饿鬼界。饿鬼界既是“恶趣”也是“苦趣”,因为它远离善趣,又是苦的去处;但它不算“陷堕”,因为它不像阿修罗那样陷堕。单提“陷堕”这个词时,指的是阿修罗众。因为按前面说的道理,它既是“恶趣”也是“苦趣”,又因为从一切圆满成就中陷落堕落,所以叫“陷堕”。单提“地狱”这个词时,指的就是无间地狱等许多种类的地狱。而在这里,所有这些词说的都是地狱。“投生”是指执取结生。巴利
Apāyantiādi sabbaṃ nirayasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi ayasaṅkhātā sukhā apetoti apāyo; saggamokkhahetubhūtā vā puññasammatā ayā apetotipi apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati; dosabahulattā vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gatītipi duggati. Vivasā nipatanti ettha dukkaṭakammakārino, vinassantā vā ettha nipatanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgāti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo. Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoni vuccati. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo sugatito apetattā, na duggati mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayo. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā, na vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipātattā. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyo. So hi yathāvuttena atthena apāyo ceva duggati ca, sabbasampattisamussayehi vinipatitattā vinipātoti ca vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādianekappakāro nirayova vuccati. Idha pana sabbapadehipi nirayova vutto. Upapajjantīti paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti.
在这些偈頌中,第一首偈頌是結集時由負責結集法的長老們所安立的。「了知後」是指先前的行為,因為授記是以智為先的。或者,「了知」一詞表示原因,就像「見到獅子後產生恐懼」那樣,意思是「以了知為因」。佛陀、在比丘們面前:指佛陀世尊向在自己面前的比丘們宣說了接下來兩首偈頌所要說明的義理。其餘部分如前所述。巴利
Gāthāsu paṭhamagāthā saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitā. Ñatvānāti pubbakālakiriyā. Ñāṇapubbakañhi byākaraṇaṃ. Hetuattho vā tvā-saddo yathā ‘‘sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’ti, jānanahetūti attho . Buddho, bhikkhūnaṃ santiketi buddho bhagavā attano santike bhikkhūnaṃ etaṃ parato dvīhi gāthāhi vuccamānaṃ atthaṃ byākāsi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
《净信心经》的注释巴利
1. Pasannacittasuttavaṇṇanā
21 第三品的第一部经里说“净信”:就是因为对三宝的信仰和对业果的信仰,而内心清净。“善趣”:就是美好的去处,或者说是快乐的归宿,所以叫善趣。“天”:因为拥有色等种种受用而极为殊胜,所以叫天。“世间”:就是指有情的世间,在这里承受福业和非福业的果报;或者也可以按“坏灭”这个含义来叫世间。这里还要说明:提到“善趣”的时候,也把人间这一趣包含进去了;提到“天”的时候,则只是指天趣。剩下的部分和前面说的一样。巴利
21. Tatiyavaggassa paṭhame pasannacittanti ratanattayasaddhāya kammaphalasaddhāya ca pasannamānasaṃ. Sugatinti sundaraṃ gatiṃ, sukhassa vā gatinti sugatiṃ. Sagganti rūpādisampattīhi suṭṭhu agganti saggaṃ. Lokanti lokiyanti ettha puññapāpaphalāni, lujjanaṭṭheneva vā lokaṃ. Ettha ca sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati, saggaggahaṇena devagati eva. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
《慈爱经》的注释巴利
2. Mettasuttavaṇṇanā
22 22. 在第二经里,“诸比丘,不要害怕福业”这句话中,“不要”是一个表示禁止的词。“福”这个词,在“诸比丘,因为受持善法,所以这福增长”等经文里,指的是福的果报;在“诸比丘,无闻凡夫造作福行”等经文里,指的是欲界和色界的善行;在“识随福而去”等经文里,指的是作为善趣中某种特殊投生处的再生有;在“诸比丘,有三种福业事:布施所成的福业事、持戒所成的福业事、修习所成的福业事”等经文里,指的是善的思。但在这里,应当理解为三界中的善法。
“害怕”在这里有两种:一种是智慧带来的害怕,一种是染着带来的害怕。其中,在“诸比丘,那些长寿、相貌美好、多享快乐、长久住在高广天宫里的天人,听了如来说法之后,大多数都生起害怕、悚惧和惊恐”等经文里所说的,是智慧带来的害怕;在“确实生起了害怕,确实生起了惊悚,确实毛骨悚然”等经文里所说的,是染着带来的害怕。这里指的也只是染着带来的害怕。
这里的意思是:诸比丘,长久以来对身体和语言的约束、对戒律仪轨的遵行、一座食、独卧、守护诸根、用头陀行来调伏心、正念正知、依止业处修习而发起精进——这些是比丘应当不间断地实践的福业。你们不要害怕它们,不要对它们生起怖畏和惊恐。不要因为害怕现世安乐会受到妨碍,就害怕那些能带来来世涅槃安乐的福业。这里用的是从格,却以属格的形式来表达。巴利
22. Dutiye mā, bhikkhave, puññānanti ettha māti paṭisedhe nipāto. Puññasaddo ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.380) puññaphale āgato. ‘‘Avijjāgatoyaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo puññañce saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) kāmarūpāvacarasucarite. ‘‘Puññūpagaṃ bhavati viññāṇa’’ntiādīsu sugativisesabhūte upapattibhave. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, puññakiriyavatthūni – dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthū’’tiādīsu (itivu. 60; a. ni. 8.36) kusalacetanāyaṃ. Idha pana tebhūmakakusaladhamme veditabbo. Bhāyitthāti ettha duvidhaṃ bhayaṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ, sārajjabhayanti. Tattha ‘‘yepi te, bhikkhave, devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā uccesu vimānesu ciraṭṭhitikā , tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.33) āgataṃ ñāṇabhayaṃ. ‘‘Ahudeva bhayaṃ, ahu chambhitattaṃ, ahu lomahaṃso’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.318) āgataṃ sārajjabhayaṃ. Idhāpi sārajjabhayameva. Ayañhettha attho – bhikkhave, dīgharattaṃ kāyavacīsaṃyamo vattapaṭivattapūraṇaṃ ekāsanaṃ, ekaseyyaṃ, indriyadamo, dhutadhammehi cittassa niggaho, satisampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena vīriyārambhoti evamādīni yāni bhikkhunā, nirantaraṃ pavattetabbāni puññāni, tehi mā bhāyittha, mā bhayaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjittha, ekaccassa diṭṭhadhammasukhassa uparodhabhayena samparāyikanibbānasukhadāyakehi puññehi mā bhāyitthāti. Nissakke hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.
现在,为了说明从此以后不应当害怕的理由,而说出“sukhassetaṃ”等话。其中,“乐”这个词,在“佛陀出世是乐,世间离欲是乐”等语句中,是用来指乐的根本;在“摩诃梨,因为色是乐、随乐、遍乐”等语句中,是指乐的所缘;在“诸比丘,这确实难以用譬喻来说明,天界有多么乐”等语句中,是指以乐为条件的处所;在“积聚福德是乐”等语句中,是指乐的原因;在“这些法是现法乐住”等语句中,是指无嗔害;在“涅槃是最高的乐”等语句中,是指涅槃;在“由于断除乐”等语句中,是指乐受;在“不苦不乐、寂静,被称为乐”等语句中,是指舍受;在“阿难,我也以方便说两种受,即可意受和苦受”等语句中,是指可意之乐;在“诸福德有乐的果报”等语句中,是指乐的果报。在这里,也应当理解为是指可意的果报。
“可意的”等词:因为应当被希求、并且排斥不可意的,所以是可意的;因为可爱、能使心欢喜、能渗入,所以是令人染着的;因为应当被喜爱、能使人满足,所以是可爱的;因为应当被尊重、能使心增长,所以是令心满足的——应当这样理解其含义。“诸福德”这个词,是“可意的、乐的果报”的同义词和名称;那本身就是乐,而被称为福德——这是通过果来指代因、将因果视为不分离的一种表达。通过这样,听到已作、已积集的福德必定会带来果报之后,就能使人不放逸地、恭敬地去造作诸福德,在修福之行中激励自己,并对这些福德生起尊重。巴利
Idāni tato abhāyitabbabhāve kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhasseta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sukhasaddo ‘‘sukho buddhānaṃ uppādo, sukhā virāgatā loke’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 194) sukhamūle āgato. ‘‘Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60) sukhārammaṇe. ‘‘Yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, na sukaraṃ akkhānena pāpuṇituṃ yāva sukhā saggā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.255) sukhapaccayaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sukho puññassa uccayo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 118) sukhahetumhi. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete dhammā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.82) abyāpajje. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 204; ma. ni. 2.215) nibbāne. ‘‘Sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 125) sukhavedanāyaṃ. ‘‘Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, sukhamicceva bhāsita’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.253; itivu. 53) upekkhāvedanāyaṃ. ‘‘Dvepi mayā, ānanda, vedanā vuttā pariyāyena sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.89) iṭṭhasukhe. ‘‘Sukho vipāko puññāna’’ntiādīsu (peṭako. 23) sukhavipāke. Idhāpi iṭṭhavipāke eva daṭṭhabbo. Iṭṭhassātiādīsu esitabbato aniṭṭhapaṭikkhepato ca iṭṭhassa, kamanīyato manasmiñca kamanato pavisanato kantassa, piyāyitabbato santappanato ca piyassa, mānanīyato manassa pavaḍḍhanato ca manāpassāti attho veditabbo. Yadidaṃ puññānīti ‘‘puññānī’’ti yadidaṃ vacanaṃ, etaṃ sukhassa iṭṭhassa vipākassa adhivacanaṃ nāmaṃ, sukhameva taṃ yadidaṃ puññanti phalena kāraṇassa abhedūpacāraṃ vadati. Tena katūpacitānaṃ puññānaṃ avassaṃbhāviphalaṃ sutvā appamattena sakkaccaṃ puññāni kātabbānīti puññakiriyāyaṃ niyojeti, ādarañca nesaṃ tattha uppādeti.
现在,为了把这个道理讲清楚,佛陀举出自己以前做苏内德时,因为所修的福业,在漫长的时间里不断体验、被中间诸有所隐蔽的最殊胜福报作为例子,说出了“我确实了知”等话。其中,“我确实了知”是指:我以殊胜的智慧了知,以亲身体验而觉知。“长时间”是指很久以来。“诸福”是指布施等善法。“七年”是指七个年头。“慈心”:“慈”的意思是柔软,也就是亲和。它存在于朋友之中,或者是朋友的这种活动,所以叫慈。从特相等方面来说:慈以利益的行相为特相,以给众生带来利益为作用,以消除嗔怒为现起,以看见众生的可爱之处为近因。灭除嗔恚是它的成就,产生贪爱是它的失败。具备这种慈的心,就叫有慈心。“修习已”:与慈俱行的心,以心为代表而说定,也就是生起并增长慈定、慈梵住。“七劫坏成”:七个大劫。单说“坏”和“成”,就已经包含了空劫和住劫。“此世间”:欲界世间。“正在坏灭时”:在坏灭的时候。“sudaṃ”只是一个不变词,意思是“正在坏灭”。也有人读作“saṃvattamāne sudaṃ”。“劫”:时间。用“劫”这个词来指时间。当时间耗尽时,劫也就耗尽了。正如所说的:巴利
Idāni attanā sunettakāle katena puññakammena dīgharattaṃ paccanubhūtaṃ bhavantarapaṭicchannaṃ uḷāratamaṃ puññavipākaṃ udāharitvā tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha abhijānāmīti abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānāmi, paccakkhato bujjhāmi. Dīgharattanti cirakālaṃ. Puññānanti dānādikusaladhammānaṃ. Satta vassānīti satta saṃvaccharāni . Mettacittanti mijjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattītipi mettā. Lakkhaṇādito pana hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā, hitūpasaṃhārarasā, āghātavinayapaccupaṭṭhānā, sattānaṃ manāpabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Byāpādūpasamo etissā sampatti, sinehāsambhavo vipatti. Sā etassa atthīti mettacittaṃ. Bhāvetvāti mettāsahagataṃ cittaṃ, cittasīsena samādhi vuttoti mettāsamādhiṃ mettābrahmavihāraṃ uppādetvā ceva vaḍḍhetvā ca. Satta saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti satta mahākappe. Saṃvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭaggahaṇeneva hi saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi-vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyinopi gahitā. Imaṃ lokanti kāmalokaṃ. Saṃvaṭṭamāne sudanti saṃvaṭṭamāne. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ vinassamāneti attho. ‘‘Saṃvattamāne suda’’nti ca paṭhanti. Kappeti kāle. Kappasīsena hi kālo vutto. Kāle khīyamāne kappopi khīyateva. Yathāha –
‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā’’ti. (jā. 1.2.190);
因为经文说“我成为极光净天的梵天”,所以这里应当知道,劫的坏灭是以火灭的方式发生的。所谓“成为极光净天”,就是以结生的方式前往极光净梵天界,所以我成为极光净天。“正在形成时”,就是正在安立、正在生起的意思。“我投生到空旷的梵宫”:因为那里没有任何有情已经投生,所以叫“空旷”;那座属于初禅地的梵宫,在劫初最先形成,我以结生的方式投生到那里、到达那里。“梵天”:因为比欲界有情更殊胜,因为功德以种种方式增长,又因为是从梵住修习中产生的,所以叫梵天。因为比梵众天和梵辅天更大,所以叫大梵天。因为他战胜了那些梵天而安住,所以叫征服者。因为不被那些梵天以任何功德战胜,所以叫不被征服者。“确实”:这是表示决定语气的虚词。“见者”:具有见的能力,他能见到过去、未来、现在,以神通智见到所应见到的——这是它的意思。其余梵天由于修习神足的力量,我使自己的心也随我掌控,所以叫自在者——应当这样结合起来理解。据说,当时菩萨虽然已经获得八等至,但为了观察这样是否能利益众生并圆满自己的波罗蜜,就在那两种禅地中生起贪着,以慈梵住而一再轮回。因此说“七年……自在者”。巴利
‘‘Ābhassarūpago homī’’ti vuttattā tejosaṃvaṭṭavasenettha kappavuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ābhassarūpagoti tattha paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ upagacchāmīti ābhassarūpago homi. Vivaṭṭamāneti saṇṭhahamāne, jāyamāneti attho. Suññaṃ brahmavimānaṃ upapajjāmīti kassaci sattassa tattha nibbattassa abhāvato suññaṃ, yaṃ paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaṅkhātaṃ brahmavimānaṃ ādito nibbattaṃ, taṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena upapajjāmi upemi. Brahmāti kāmāvacarasattehi seṭṭhaṭṭhena tathā tathā brūhitaguṇatāya brahmavihārato nibbattaṭṭhena ca brahmā. Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitehi mahanto brahmāti mahābrahmā. Tato eva te abhibhavitvā ṭhitattā abhibhū. Tehi kenaci guṇena na abhibhūtoti anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dasoti dassanasīlo, so atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ dassanasamattho, abhiññāṇena passitabbaṃ passāmīti attho. Sesabrahmānaṃ iddhipādabhāvanābalena attano cittañca mama vase vattemīti vasavattī homīti yojetabbaṃ. Tadā kira bodhisatto aṭṭhasamāpattilābhīpi samāno tathā sattahitaṃ attano pāramiparipūraṇañca olokento tāsu eva dvīsu jhānabhūmīsu nikantiṃ uppādetvā mettābrahmavihāravasena aparāparaṃ saṃsari. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavassāni…pe… vasavattī’’ti.
世尊这样说明了色界福业的果报之大以后,现在要显示欲界福业也有同样的果报,于是说了“三十六次”等话。其中,“成为帝释天”是说:在三十六次中都没有投生到别处,而是连续不断地成为帝释天,也就是三十三天的天王。“成为王”等句中:以四种稀有法和四种摄众之法让世间欢喜,所以称为“王”。使轮宝转动,以四种成就之轮运转,又用这些轮带动他人运转,为了利益他人而威仪之行轮转不断,这在他身上存在,所以称为“转轮王”。这里“王”是通称,“转轮王”是特称。“依法而行”所以是“如法的”,意思是依公正平等而行。只以法获得王位而成为王,所以是“法王”。或者,以利益他人的法行成为“如法的”,以利益自己的法行成为“法王”。“拥有四疆的主权”,意思是对以四海为边、以四洲为庄严的大地拥有主宰权。在内战胜忿怒等敌对者,在外不施杖、不用刀而战胜一切国王,所以是“胜者”。已使国土达到稳固恒常的状态,任何人都无法动摇它;或者国土对他已经稳固,民众依附、安住于自己的事务,不动不摇,所以是“国土稳固成就者”。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā rūpāvacarapuññassa vipākamahantataṃ pakāsetvā idāni kāmāvacarapuññassāpi taṃ dassento ‘‘chattiṃsakkhattu’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sakko ahosinti chattiṃsa vāre aññattha anupapajjitvā nirantaraṃ sakko devānamindo tāvatiṃsadevarājā ahosi. Rājā ahosintiādīsu catūhi acchariyadhammehi catūhi ca saṅgahavatthūhi lokaṃ rañjetīti rājā. Cakkaratanaṃ vatteti, catūhi sampatticakkehi vattati, tehi ca paraṃ vatteti, parahitāya ca iriyāpathacakkānaṃ vatto etasmiṃ atthīti cakkavattī. Rājāti cettha sāmaññaṃ, cakkavattīti visesaṃ. Dhammena caratīti dhammiko. Ñāyena samena vattatīti attho. Dhammeneva rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jātoti dhammarājā. Parahitadhammacaraṇena vā dhammiko, attahitadhammacaraṇena dhammarājā, caturantāya issaroti cāturanto, catusamuddantāya catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāya ca pathaviyā issaroti attho. Ajjhattaṃ kopādipaccatthike, bahiddhā ca sabbarājāno adaṇḍena asatthena vijesīti vijitāvī. Janapade thāvarabhāvaṃ dhuvabhāvaṃ patto, na sakkā kenaci tato cāletuṃ janapado vā tamhi thāvariyappatto anuyutto sakammanirato acalo asampavedhīti janapadatthāvariyappatto.
转轮宝、象宝、马宝、珠宝、女宝、居士宝、将军宝,具足这七种宝,就叫作具足七宝。在这些宝当中,转轮王靠轮宝征服尚未归顺的地方,靠象宝和马宝在已征服的国土中安乐地巡行,靠将军宝守护已征服的国土,靠其余的宝享受受用的快乐。对他来说,第一种宝与精进力相应,最后一种宝与谋略力相应,象宝、马宝、居士宝则与势力相应而达到圆满,女宝和珠宝是这三种力结合所生的果报。他靠女宝和珠宝享受受用之乐,靠其余的宝享受受用之乐。应当知道,特别地,前三种宝是靠无嗔善根所生业力的力量成就的,中间三种是靠无贪善根所生业力的力量成就的,最后一种则是靠无痴善根所生业力的力量成就的。这是就地方王国,也就是小王国而言。巴利
Cakkaratanaṃ, hatthiratanaṃ, assaratanaṃ, maṇiratanaṃ, itthiratanaṃ, gahapatiratanaṃ, pariṇāyakaratananti imehi sattahi ratanehi samupetoti sattaratanasamannāgato. Tesu hi rājā cakkavatti cakkaratanena ajitaṃ jināti, hatthiassaratanehi vijite sukheneva anuvicarati, pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati, sesehi upabhogasukhamanubhavati. Paṭhamena cassa ussāhasattiyogo , pacchimena mantasattiyogo, hatthiassagahapatiratanehi pabhūsattiyogo suparipuṇṇo hoti, itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ. So itthimaṇiratanehi paribhogasukhamanubhavati, sesehi upabhogasukhaṃ. Visesato cassa purimāni tīṇi adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti, majjhimāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena, pacchimamekaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti veditabbaṃ padesarajjassāti khuddakarajjassa.
“他生起了这样的念头”:这是说,当他在最后一生作为转轮王时,回顾自己的种种成就,心里生起了这样的想法:“我这业到底带来了什么果报?”等等。其实在每一次投生中,无论生到哪里,他都会生起这个念头。不过这里是根据转轮王那一期生命来展开说明的。
“具大威力者”:因为他拥有以珠宝、象宝等为首的大量财富、坐骑等成就,国土也安稳富足,所以具有这样的大威力。
“具大神力者”:因为他具足轮宝等,不用压迫任何人,就能让各国国王恭敬地接受他的教令,还能在虚空中飞行等等,所以有这样的大神力。
“施”:就是布施食物等应当布施的东西。
“调御”:既指调伏眼等诸根,也指通过修定来调伏贪等烦恼。
“自制”:指在身体行为和言语上的自我约束。
其中,通过修定来调伏烦恼,属于修习所成的福,而且这里特指以慈心为内容的梵住。这慈心梵住的修习又分为近行定和安止定两种:如果达到安止定,就依此投生到前面说的两种禅那境地;其余三种福行,则随其各自相应的程度,让他成就转轮王等身份。应当这样理解。巴利
Etadahosīti attano sampattiyo paccavekkhantassa pacchime cakkavattikāle etaṃ ‘‘kissa nu kho me idaṃ kammassa phala’’ntiādikaṃ ahosi. Sabbatthakameva tasmiṃ tasmimpi bhave etadahosiyeva. Tatthāyaṃ cakkavattikālavasena yojanā. Evaṃmahiddhikoti maṇiratanahatthiratanādippamukhāya kosavāhanasampattiyā janapadatthāvariyappattiyā ca evaṃmahiddhiko. Evaṃmahānubhāvoti cakkaratanādisamannāgamena kassacipi pīḷaṃ akarontova sabbarājūhi sirasā sampaṭicchitasāsanavehāsagamanādīhi evaṃ mahānubhāvo. Dānassāti annādideyyadhammapariccāgassa. Damassāti cakkhādiindriyadamanassa ceva samādhānavasena rāgādikilesadamanassa ca. Saṃyamassāti kāyavacīsaṃyamassa. Tattha yaṃ samādhānavasena kilesadamanaṃ, taṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññaṃ , tañca kho mettābrahmavihārabhūtaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Tasmiñca upacārappanābhedena duvidhe yaṃ appanāppattaṃ, tenassa yathāvuttāsu dvīsu jhānabhūmīsu upapatti ahosi. Itarena tividhenāpi yathārahaṃ pattacakkavattiādibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
世尊这样把自己当作身证者,说明福德果报的广大之后,现在要用偈颂来显示这个道理,于是说了“正是福……”等话。其中,“他应当学正是福”:凡是想要利益自己的良家子,对于因为能产生福果、又能净化自己的相续而得名为“福”的三种善法,就应当学习、确立、积集、产生。“未来最上”:因为能带来广大的果报、殊胜的果报,所以叫“未来最上”;或者因为能带来可爱、可意的果报,在未来果报中最为最上,所以叫“未来最上”;又或者因为生起它的因——如理作意等——最为殊胜,所以叫“未来最上”。这里的“t”是连音字。或者也可以说,以福所生的果最为殊胜、第一,所以叫“未来最上”。正因为这样,才说“带来乐果”,也就是能带来快乐果报的意思。巴利
Iti bhagavā attānaṃ kāyasakkhi katvā puññānaṃ vipākamahantataṃ pakāsetvā idāni tamevatthaṃ gāthābandhena dassento ‘‘puññamevā’’tiādimāha. Tattha puññameva so sikkheyyāti yo atthakāmo kulaputto, so puññaphalanibbattanato, attano santānaṃ punanato ca ‘‘puñña’’nti laddhanāmaṃ tividhaṃ kusalameva sikkheyya niveseyya upacineyya pasaveyyāti attho. Āyatagganti vipulaphalatāya uḷāraphalatāya āyataggaṃ, piyamanāpaphalatāya vā āyatiṃ uttamanti āyataggaṃ, āyena vā yonisomanasikārādippaccayena uḷāratamena agganti āyataggaṃ . Takāro padasandhikaro. Atha vā āyena puññaphalena aggaṃ padhānanti āyataggaṃ. Tato eva sukhudrayaṃ sukhavipākanti attho.
那么,什么是福德?又该怎样修学它呢?经文说:“应当修习布施、正行和慈心。”其中,“正行”是指远离身体的不正行等,实践身体的正行,也就是极为清净的戒。“应当修习”是指在自己的心相续中生起并令其增长。“这些法”是指布施等这些善行之法。“为乐之源”是指它们能带来乐的功德利益,这里显示这些福的果报就是乐。“无恼害的乐之世间”:因为远离了爱欲等恼害,所以是无恼害、无苦的;至于没有对他人的逼迫伤害,那更不必说了。又因为依禅那等至而具有众多快乐,所以称为乐;由禅那之福所生的梵天界是纯粹的乐,而由其他福所招感的种种成就和生存状态,则称为乐的世间。智者、有智慧的人会往生、到达那里。如此,在这部经和偈颂中所说明的,正是轮回中的殊胜成就。巴利
Katamaṃ pana taṃ puññaṃ, kathañca naṃ sikkheyyāti āha ‘‘dānañca samacariyañca, mettacittañca bhāvaye’’ti. Tattha samacariyanti kāyavisamādīni vajjetvā kāyasamādicaritaṃ , suvisuddhaṃ sīlanti attho. Bhāvayeti attano santāne uppādeyya vaḍḍheyya. Ete dhammeti ete dānādike sucaritadhamme. Sukhasamuddayeti sukhānisaṃse, ānisaṃsaphalampi nesaṃ sukhamevāti dasseti. Abyāpajjaṃ sukhaṃ lokanti kāmacchandādibyāpādavirahitattā abyāpajjaṃ niddukkhaṃ, parapīḷābhāve pana vattabbaṃ natthi. Jhānasamāpattivasena sukhabahulattā sukhaṃ, ekantasukhañca brahmalokaṃ jhānapuññānaṃ, itarapuññānaṃ pana tadaññaṃ sampattibhavasaṅkhātaṃ sukhaṃ lokaṃ paṇḍito sappañño upapajjati upeti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte gāthāsu ca vaṭṭasampatti eva kathitā.
第三 两义经的注释巴利
3. Ubhayatthasuttavaṇṇanā
23 在第三经的注释中,“已修习”是指已经令它生起并且使之增长。“已多作”是指一次又一次地去做。“义利”就是利益。因为它应当被追求、应当去接近获得,所以称为“义利”。“正持而住”是指正确地把握之后,不放弃地持续保持。“现法义利”中,“现法”指的是当下可见的自身;属于现法、存在于现法之中的,就是“现法义利”,意思是包含在此世生命当中的利益。“后世义利”中,“后世”是指因为法的缘故而应当前往的下一世,也就是他世;属于后世、存在于后世之中的,就是“后世义利”,这里说的是包含在未来生命当中的利益。巴利
23. Tatiye bhāvitoti uppādito ca vaḍḍhito ca. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Atthoti hitaṃ. Tañhi araṇīyato upagantabbato atthoti vuccati. Samadhigayha tiṭṭhatīti sammā pariggahetvā avijahitvā vattati. Diṭṭhadhammikanti diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkhabhūto attabhāvo, diṭṭhadhamme bhavaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ, idhalokapariyāpannanti attho. Samparāyikanti dhammavasena samparetabbato samparāyo, paraloko, samparāye bhavaṃ samparāyikaṃ, paralokapariyāpannanti vuttaṃ hoti.
那么,什么是“现法义利”,什么又是“后世义利”呢?简单来说,凡是这一世的安乐,以及将来能带来这一世安乐的东西,就是现法义利。比如:对在家人来说,这一生中各种财产和谋生工具、事业顺利没有纠纷、妥善保养身体、打扫清理住处、从事各种技艺和学问、照顾好自己的家人眷属等等,都属于这一类。对出家人来说,则是维持生活的资具,也就是衣服、乞食所得的食物、住处、生病时所需的药物。能不太费力地得到这些资具,得到之后能带着省察去受用,知道什么该避开,保持住处干净整洁,少欲,知足,喜欢独处,不与人混杂交往等等。而住在合适的地方、亲近善知识、听闻正法、如理作意等,则是两种人都共通的,对两种人都适合,应当这样理解。巴利
Ko panesa diṭṭhadhammiko nāma attho, ko vā samparāyikoti? Saṅkhepena tāva yaṃ idhalokasukhaṃ, yañcetarahi idhalokasukhāvahaṃ, ayaṃ diṭṭhadhammiko attho. Seyyathidaṃ – gahaṭṭhānaṃ tāva idha yaṃ kiñci vittūpakaraṇaṃ, anākulakammantatā, ārogyasaṃvidhānaṃ, vatthuvisadakiriyāyogavihitāni sippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānāni saṅgahitaparijanatāti evamādi. Pabbajitānaṃ pana ye ime jīvitaparikkhārā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā. Tesaṃ akicchalābho, tattha ca saṅkhāya paṭisevanā , saṅkhāya parivajjanā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, appicchatā, santuṭṭhi, paviveko, asaṃsaggoti evamādi. Patirūpadesavāsasappurisūpanissayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikārādayo pana ubhayesaṃ sādhāraṇā ubhayānurūpā cāti veditabbā.
“不放逸”在这里,应当理解为与“放逸”相反的状态。那么,什么是“放逸”呢?就是放逸的行为方式。经中这样说过:巴利
Appamādoti ettha appamādo pamādappaṭipakkhato veditabbo. Ko panesa pamādo nāma? Pamajjanākāro. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
在这里,什么是放逸?对身恶行、语恶行、意恶行,或对五种欲乐,心的放纵、不放纵之不生起;或者对善法的修习,不恭敬地做、不持续地做、不稳固地做,退缩不前,舍弃意愿,放下担子,不亲近、不修习、不反复练习,不确立、不投入,这就是放逸。这样的放逸,就是放逸的行为、放逸的状态。这称为放逸。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo pamādo? Kāyaduccarite vā vacīduccarite vā manoduccarite vā pañcasu vā kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo vossaggānuppādanaṃ kusalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asakkaccakiriyatā asātaccakiriyatā anaṭṭhitakiriyatā olīnavuttitā nikkhittachandatā nikkhittadhuratā anāsevanā abhāvanā abahulīkammaṃ anadhiṭṭhānaṃ ananuyogopamādo. Yo evarūpo pamādo pamajjanā pamajjitattaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati pamādo’’ti (vibha. 846).
所以,要从前面所说的反面来理解不放逸。从含义上说,它就是不离开念,恒常保持正念,这才叫这个名字。不过另一些人说:以念和正知相应而生起的四个无色蕴,就是不放逸。巴利
Tasmā vuttappaṭipakkhato appamādo veditabbo. Atthato hi so satiyā avippavāso, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘satisampajaññayogena pavattā cattāro arūpino khandhā appamādo’’ti vadanti.
已经说“已修习、已多修习”,那么这“不放逸”到底该怎么修习呢?其实,并没有一种单独存在的、叫做“不放逸修习”的修习。凡是福德的行为、善的行为,这一切都应该被理解为就是不放逸的修习。特别是,从以出离为助缘的皈依,以及身和语的防护来看,一切戒的修习、一切定的修习、一切慧的修习、一切善的修习、无过失的修习,都应理解为就是不放逸的修习。因为“不放逸”这个词揭示的是广大的含义,它含摄并立足于广大的含义。就算一位说法者把整部三藏佛语都搬来,用来解释“不放逸”这个词的含义并加以宣说,也不能说他是“在不该涉入的地方涉入”。为什么?因为“不放逸”这个词含义广大。正因为如此,正自觉者在拘尸那罗双娑罗树之间,即将般涅槃而躺下时,把从成正觉以来四十五年间自己所说的法,用一个词统摄起来开示,对比丘们作了这样的教诫:“要以不放逸而成就!”并且这样说:巴利
‘‘Bhāvito bahūlīkato’’ti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ panāyaṃ appamādo bhāvetabboti? Na appamādabhāvanā nāma visuṃ ekabhāvanā atthi. Yā hi kāci puññakiriyā kusalakiriyā, sabbā sā appamādabhāvanātveva veditabbā. Visesato pana vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ kāyikavācasikasaṃvarañca upādāya sabbā sīlabhāvanā, sabbā samādhibhāvanā, sabbā paññābhāvanā, sabbā kusalabhāvanā, anavajjabhāvanā, appamādabhāvanāti veditabbā. ‘‘Appamādo’’ti hi idaṃ mahantaṃ atthaṃ dīpeti, mahantaṃ atthaṃ pariggahetvā tiṭṭhati. Sakalampi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āharitvā appamādapadassa atthaṃ katvā kathento dhammakathiko ‘‘atitthena pakkhando’’ti na vattabbo. Kasmā? Appamādapadassa mahantabhāvato. Tathā hi sammāsambuddho kusinārāyaṃ yamakasālānamantare parinibbānasamaye nipanno abhisambodhito paṭṭhāya pañcacattālīsāya vassesu attanā bhāsitaṃ dhammaṃ ekena padena saṅgahetvā dassento – ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ ovādamadāsi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
比丘们,就像所有陆生动物的足迹,全都归入大象的足迹之中,大象的足迹因为广大,被称为它们当中最殊胜的;同样地,比丘们,所有善法都以不放逸为根本,都汇归到不放逸,不放逸被称为这些善法中最殊胜的。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave , yāni kānici jaṅgalānaṃ pāṇānaṃ padajātāni, sabbāni tāni hatthipade samodhānaṃ gacchanti, hatthipadaṃ tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati yadidaṃ mahantaṭṭhena; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbete appamādamūlakā appamādasamosaraṇā, appamādo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.300).
在偈颂里说“赞叹不放逸”,意思是:智者——也就是有智慧的人、佛陀等——对布施等福德善行中的不放逸、不疏忽,给予赞叹、称扬、推崇。为什么呢?因为不放逸的智者能同时获得两种利益。那两种利益是什么呢?经文说“现世的利益,以及后世的利益”,这里的文句搭配应当这样理解。其中,“现世的利益”:对在家人来说,就是通过经文所说的“无过失的行为、不混乱的事业”等,靠农耕、牧牛等方法所获得的利益;对出家人来说,则应理解为无追悔等利益。而“后世的利益”,则应理解为对两者而言所说的都是法行。通达义:即获得两种利益——有益之利——的证得;与应得之利相会合、结合、契合,称为“时机”,即获得。时机本身就是通达,或者以面向之义,时机为通达,这里应这样理解通达。由于具足坚毅,故为智者。这里,第三个“义”字也应摄受胜义涅槃。其余部分极易理解。如此,在这部经中,只说了轮转圆满。而在偈颂中,则应见出离圆满也被摄受。正如所说——巴利
Gāthāsu appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti dānādipuññakiriyāsu appamādaṃ appamajjanaṃ paṇḍitā sappaññā buddhādayo pasaṃsanti, vaṇṇenti thomenti. Kasmā? Yasmā appamatto ubho atthe adhigaṇhāti paṇḍito. Ke pana te ubho atthāti āha – ‘‘diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko’’ti, evamettha padayojanā veditabbā. Idhāpi diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo atthoti gahaṭṭhassa tāva ‘‘anavajjāni kammāni, anākulā ca kammantā’’tiādinā nayena vutto kasigorakkhādividhinā laddhabbo attho, pabbajitassa pana avippaṭisārādiattho veditabbo. Yo cattho samparāyikoti pana ubhayesampi dhammacariyāva vuttāti veditabbā. Atthābhisamayāti duvidhassapi atthassa hitassa paṭilābhā, laddhabbena samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, lābho. Samayo eva abhisamayo, abhimukhabhāvena vā samayo abhisamayoti evamettha abhisamayo veditabbo. Dhitisampannattā dhīro. Tatiyena cettha attha-saddena paramatthassa nibbānassāpi saṅgaho veditabbo. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭasampatti eva kathitā. Gāthāyaṃ pana vivaṭṭassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
不放逸是不死的境界,放逸是死亡的境界。
不放逸的人不会死,放逸的人就像死人一样。
智者这样从殊胜的层面了知之后,就在不放逸上用心。
他们乐于不放逸,欢喜于诸圣者的行境。
那些修禅的人,持续不断,始终坚定地精进。
智者触证涅槃——那无上的轭安稳。巴利
‘‘Appamādo amatapadaṃ, pamādo maccuno padaṃ; Appamattā na mīyanti, ye pamattā yathā matā. ‘‘Evaṃ visesato ñatvā, appamādamhi paṇḍitā; Appamāde pamodanti, ariyānaṃ gocare ratā. ‘‘Te jhāyino sātatikā, niccaṃ daḷhaparakkamā; Phusanti dhīrā nibbānaṃ, yogakkhemaṃ anuttara’’nti. (dha. pa. 21-23);
所以,在“以义现观”这个说法里,“义”也应该从出世间的义这个角度来理解。巴利
Tasmā ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’ti ettha lokuttaratthavasenapi attho veditabbo.
第四 骨堆经的注释巴利
4. Aṭṭhipuñjasuttavaṇṇanā
24 在第四经中说到“一人”时,这里的“人”是世俗层面的说法。因为佛陀、世尊的开示有两种:世俗层面的开示和胜义层面的开示。其中,“人、有情、女人、男人、刹帝利、婆罗门、天人、魔罗”这一类,属于世俗层面的开示;“无常、苦、无我、蕴、界、处、念处”这一类,属于胜义层面的开示。在这两种开示中,世尊对那些听了世俗层面的开示就能证得殊胜果位的人,就为他们作世俗层面的开示;对那些听了胜义层面的开示才能证得殊胜果位的人,就为他们作胜义层面的开示。巴利
24. Catutthe ekapuggalassāti ettha puggaloti ayaṃ vohārakathā. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā ca paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha ‘‘puggalo, satto, itthī, puriso, khattiyo, brāhmaṇo, devo, māro’’ti evarūpā sammutidesanā. ‘‘Aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, anattā, khandhā, dhātu, āyatanā, satipaṭṭhānā’’ti evarūpā paramatthadesanā. Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, nesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti.
在这里,可以用一个比喻来说明:比如有一位老师,精通各地的方言,又善于讲解三部吠陀的含义。对那些听得懂达罗毗荼语所讲内容的人,他就用达罗毗荼语来讲;对那些听得懂安达卡语等其他某种语言的人,他就用那种语言来讲。这样一来,那些年轻人依靠这位聪明能干的老师,很快就能学会技艺。在这个比喻里,老师好比是佛陀、世尊;三部吠陀好比是需要解说的三藏;精通各地语言好比是精通世俗和胜义的技能;说不同语言的年轻人好比是能够依照世俗或胜义的方式理解的应受教者;老师用达罗毗荼语等来讲解,就应当理解为世尊依照世俗或胜义的方式来说法。关于这一点,他说:巴利
Tatthāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati. Ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya tāya bhāsāya. Evaṃ te māṇavakā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā, tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāve ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni, desabhāsākosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ, nānādesabhāsā māṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthavasena paṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyā, ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasena desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
正等觉者——说法者中最殊胜的人——宣说了两种谛。
世俗谛和究竟谛之外,找不到第三个谛。
约定俗成的说法是真实的,因为这是世间共许的缘故。
究竟义的言说是真实的,因为它是诸法的真实原因。
所以,对于那位精通世间言说方式的世间怙主、导师,
对使用世间共许说法的人,不会产生妄语。巴利
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. ‘‘Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. ‘‘Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti.
另外,世尊从八个方面来谈“人”这个话题:为了说明知惭知愧,为了说明业属于自己,为了说明个人自己要负责任,为了说明无间业,为了说明梵住,为了说明宿命通,为了说明布施的清净,以及为了不废弃世间的共识。
如果直接说“诸蕴、诸界、诸处知惭知愧”,一般人听不懂,会糊涂,甚至会反感,心想:“这些蕴、界、处知惭知愧,到底是什么意思?”但如果换种说法——“女人知惭知愧,男人、刹帝利、婆罗门、天人、魔罗知惭知愧”——他们就能听懂,不会糊涂,也不会反感。所以,世尊为了说明知惭知愧,才用“人”这个说法来讲。巴利
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ, paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ, , ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ, brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ, pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ, dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ, lokasammutiyā appahānatthaṃ, cāti. ‘‘Khandhadhātuāyatanāni hiriyanti ottappantī’’ti hi vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti – ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni hiriyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Itthī hiriyati ottappati, puriso, khattiyo, brāhmaṇo, devo, māro’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu vā hoti. Tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
如果说“诸蕴是业的所有者,诸界、诸处是业的所有者”,道理也是一样。因此,为了阐明业的所有者等含义,他也宣说关于补特伽罗的言教。巴利
‘‘Khandhā kammassakā, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā kammassakatādīpanatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti.
即使有人说“竹林精舍等大寺是由诸蕴所建造,由诸界、诸处所建造”,道理也是一样。同样,即使有人说“诸蕴杀害母亲、杀害父亲、杀害阿罗汉,造下出佛身血之业、破僧之业,诸界、诸处也是如此”,道理也是一样。即使有人说“诸蕴修习慈心,诸界、诸处修习”,道理也是一样。即使有人说“诸蕴回忆宿命,诸界、诸处回忆”,道理也是一样。因此,世尊为了阐明个人自身的行为、阐明无间业、阐明梵住、阐明宿命,而宣说关于补特伽罗的教说。巴利
‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā, dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tathā ‘‘khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti, pitaraṃ, arahantaṃ, ruhiruppādakammaṃ, saṅghabhedakammaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ pubbenivāsadīpanatthañca puggalakathaṃ katheti.
如果直接说“诸蕴接受布施,诸界、诸处接受布施”,一般人听不懂,会陷入困惑,甚至产生抵触:“诸蕴、诸界、诸处接受布施,这到底是什么意思?”但如果换种说法,说“人接受布施”,大家就听得懂,不会困惑,也不会抵触。所以,世尊为了说明布施如何得以清净,就采用“人”这个说法来讲。巴利
‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohaṃ āpajjati, paṭisattu vā hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhā dhātuyo āyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti pana vutte jānāti, na sammohaṃ āpajjati, na paṭisattu vā hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
佛陀与世尊们并不舍弃世间的共许。他们正是立足于世间的共名、世间的语言、世间的称呼来说法。因此,世尊为了不舍弃世间共许,也讲了补特伽罗的道理。他在这里为了显示应当随顺世间共许来说的义理,便说了“于一补特伽罗”等话。巴利
Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto na pajahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyā lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti. So idhāpi lokavohāravasena desetabbamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ekapuggalassā’’tiādimāha.
这里,“一个补特伽罗”就是指一个有情。“劫”是指大劫。虽然在绝对相续的语境中这里用的是受格,但应当依据有情在其中流转、轮回的那个劫来理解。“骨聚”是指骨的部分。也有人读作“骨积聚”,意思是骨的积聚。“骨堆”就是骨的集合。“骨山”是它的同义词。不过有些人说:“从腰以下,集合叫‘骨聚’,从腰以上到多罗树那么高的叫‘骨堆’,再往上叫‘骨山’。”那只是他们自己的看法。所有这些都只是骨集合的同义词,因为它们都是作为“广大”的譬喻而举出来的。巴利
Tattha ekapuggalassāti ekasattassa. Kappanti mahākappaṃ. Yadipi accantasaṃyoge idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, yattha pana sattānaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ sambhavati, tassa vasena gahetabbaṃ. Aṭṭhikaṅkaloti aṭṭhibhāgo. ‘‘Aṭṭhikhalo’’tipi paṭhanti, aṭṭhisañcayoti attho. Aṭṭhipuñjoti aṭṭhisamūho. Aṭṭhirāsīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘kaṭippamāṇato heṭṭhā samūho kaṅkalo nāma, tato upari yāva tālappamāṇaṃ puñjo, tato upari rāsī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Sabbametaṃ samūhasseva pariyāyavacanaṃ vepullasseva upamābhāvena āhaṭattā.
如果有一个收集者,把骨头收拢起来存放好——这是用假设的方式在说:假如真有这么一个人。接着又说“所收集的也不会消失”,同样是用假设的方式在说:由某人收集起来的那堆骨头,假如不会因为消失而腐烂、碎成粉末——也就是说,假设它不会消失。这里的意思是:比丘们,一个有情因为业和烦恼一生又一生地不断受生,在轮回中流转一个大劫,这样累积起来的骨骸,就有这么多——长、宽、高都跟这座广大的毗富罗山一样。不过,这只是假设有一个能收集存放的人,而且所收集的东西不会消失。这个说法,是把那些像熄灭的灯一样、本性就是坏灭的、不留下遗骸的化生有情,以及完全没有骨头的微小身形排除在外之后才说的。有些人说:“这个道理既然是用假设引出来的,那么即使对化生等有情,如果他们有骨聚,这个骨堆的量也照样适用。”另一些人则说:“不是这样。这是针对实际能形成骨堆的有情,由一切知智判定其数量而说的。所以,应当按前面所说的意思来理解。”巴利
Sace saṃhārako assāti avippakiraṇavasena saṃharitvā ṭhapetā koci yadi siyāti parikappanavasena vadati. Sambhatañca na vinasseyyāti tathā kenaci sambhatañca taṃ aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ antaradhānābhāvena pūtibhūtaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇañca ahutvā sace na vinasseyyāti parikappanavaseneva vadati. Ayañhettha attho – bhikkhave, ekassa sattassa kammakilesehi aparāparuppattivasena ekaṃ mahākappaṃ sandhāvantassa saṃsarantassa evaṃ mahāaṭṭhisañcayo bhaveyya, ārohapariṇāhehi yattakoyaṃ vepullapabbato. Sace panassa koci saṃharitvā ṭhapetā bhaveyya, sambhatañca taṃ sace avinassantaṃ tiṭṭheyyāti. Ayañca nayo nibbutappadīpe viya bhijjanasabhāve kaḷevaranikkheparahite opapātikattabhāve sabbena sabbaṃ anaṭṭhike ca khuddakattabhāve vajjetvā vutto. Keci pana ‘‘parikappanavasena imassa nayassa āhaṭattā tesampi yadi siyā aṭṭhikaṅkalo, tenāpi saheva ayaṃ aṭṭhipuñjaparimāṇo vutto’’ti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘nayidamevaṃ labbhamānasseva aṭṭhipuñjassa vasena sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā imassa parimāṇassa vuttatā. Tasmā vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo’’ti.
在偈颂中,“大仙”是指:寻求广大的戒蕴等功德的人,所以叫大仙,也就是正自觉者。而“如是,大仙所说”这一句,是世尊像在“比丘们,如来具足十力”等说法中那样,把自己当作别人来展示。Vepulla(广山):在环绕王舍城而立的五座山中,因为山体广大,所以得名Vepulla。也正因如此,它很大,从所处方位来看,位于灵鹫峰的北面。Giribbaja(山城):在名为山城的王舍城附近。巴利
Gāthāsu mahesināti mahante sīlakkhandhādayo esati gavesatīti mahesī, sammāsambuddho. ‘‘Iti vuttaṃ mahesinā’’ti ca bhagavā ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato, bhikkhave, tathāgato’’tiādīsu viya attānaṃ aññaṃ viya katvā dasseti. Vepulloti rājagahaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitesu pañcasu pabbatesu vipulabhāvato vepulloti laddhanāmo. Tato eva mahā, ṭhitadisābhāgavasena uttaro gijjhakūṭassa. Giribbajeti giribbajapuranāmakassa rājagahassa samīpe.
世尊用“就算只在这段时间里,一个还没有斩断轮回根源、还没有彻底看透身心真相的凡夫,他的苦蕴也会这样不断堆积增长”这句话,先指出了轮回的过患。接着,为了说明:正是因为还没有领悟、还没有证见四圣谛,无闻凡夫才会这样不断堆积苦蕴;而对于已经亲见圣谛的圣者来说,这种情况根本不存在——世尊于是说出了“当以正慧彻见圣谛时”等话。巴利
Ettāvatā bhagavā ‘‘ettakenāpi kālena anupacchinnabhavamūlassa apariññātavatthukassa puthujjanassa ayamīdisī kaṭasivaḍḍhanā’’ti vaṭṭe ādīnavaṃ dassetvā idāni yesaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā andhaputhujjanassa evaṃ kaṭasivaḍḍhanā, tāni ariyasaccāni diṭṭhavato ariyapuggalassa ayaṃ natthīti dassento ‘‘yato ca ariyasaccānī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“yato”的意思是“当……的时候”。“圣谛”:因为应当被了知,所以是“圣”;因为真实不虚,所以是“谛”,合起来就是“圣谛”。或者说,能使人成为圣者的谛,就是圣谛。或者说,应当被佛陀等圣者们所证悟的谛,就是圣谛。或者说,属于圣者的谛,就是圣谛。另外,因为与诸天在内的整个世界共同皈依、应当被了知的圣者就是世尊,而由于他以自生智亲自彻见,所以属于他的谛,就叫圣谛。“以正慧彻见”:意思是以正确的、伴随观慧的道慧,通过遍知、断除、作证、修习等证入方式,以正因、正途来彻见。“苦”等语,是对圣谛自相的显示。其中,因为是一切灾患的依处,所以是卑劣的;因为远离愚人遍计的常、净、乐,所以是空虚的,因此是苦。苦依此而生起,所以是苦集,即苦之集起。依此、即以它为所缘缘,或者在此之中,超越苦,所以是苦的超越,即涅槃。因为远离、因为应当被了知而远离烦恼,所以是圣。依正见等八支,所以是八支的。令魔死去,令烦恼行去,为求解脱涅槃者所寻求,或者自己行向涅槃,所以是道。正因为如此,行向苦的寂止、即苦的灭尽,所以是导向苦寂止者。由于“以正慧彻见”,所以是此关联。巴利
Tattha yatoti yadā. Ariyasaccānīti araṇīyato ariyāni, avitathabhāvena saccāni cāti ariyasaccāni, ariyabhāvakarāni vā saccāni ariyasaccāni, ariyehi vā buddhādīhi paṭivijjhitabbāni saccāni ariyasaccāni. Atha vā ariyassa saccāni ariyasaccāni. Sadevakena hi lokena saraṇanti araṇīyato ariyo bhagavā, tena sayambhuñāṇena diṭṭhattā tassa saccānīti ariyasaccāni. Sammappaññāya passatīti sammā hetunā ñāyena vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena passati. Dukkhantiādi ariyasaccānaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Tattha anekūpaddavādhiṭṭhānatāya kucchitabhāvato bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattavirahena tucchabhāvato ca dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ samuppajjati etenāti dukkhasamuppādo, dukkhasamudayo. Dukkhaṃ atikkamati etena ārammaṇappaccayabhūtena, ettha vāti dukkhassa atikkamo, nibbānaṃ. Ārakattā kilesehi araṇīyato ca ariyo. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgiko. Mārento kilese gacchati, nibbānatthikehi maggīyati, sayaṃ vā nibbānaṃ maggatīti maggo. Tato eva dukkhassa upasamaṃ nirodhaṃ gacchatīti dukkhūpasamagāmī. Yato sammappaññāya passatīti sambandho.
那位流转轮回、最多七次的补特伽罗:他就是这样彻见四谛的圣者补特伽罗,也就是入流者(须陀洹),在根性最迟钝的情况下,在诸有中一次一次地受生,流转、轮回,最多只有七次。由于根性有锐利、中等、迟钝的差别,入流者共有三种:一种子者、家家者、七次者。其中,针对根性最迟钝的人,说了这句话:“他流转之后,最多七次。”成为苦的终结者:就是成为轮回之苦的终结者、使它彻底结束。怎么做到呢?通过渐次证得最高的道,断尽一切结,舍弃所有毫无剩余的结,所以这段开示最终以阿拉汉果为顶点。巴利
Sasattakkhattuṃ paramaṃ, sandhāvitvāna puggaloti so evaṃ catusaccadassāvī ariyapuggalo sotāpanno sabbamudindriyo samāno sattavāraparamaṃyeva bhavādīsu aparāparuppattivasena sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā. Ekabījī, kolaṃkolo, sattakkhattuparamoti indriyānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena tayo hi sotāpannā. Tesu sabbamudindriyassa vasenidaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sa sattakkhattuṃ paramaṃ, sandhāvitvānā’’ti . Dukkhassantakaro hotīti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaro pariyosānakaro hoti. Kathaṃ? Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayā anupubbena aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā niravasesānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khepanāti arahattaphaleneva desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi.
第五 妄语经注释巴利
5. Musāvādasuttavaṇṇanā
25 25. 在第五经中,“一法已过”这句话是怎么来的呢?世尊和比丘僧团获得了极大的利养与恭敬,外道们的利养却衰落了。他们失去了利养与恭敬,变得黯淡无光、毫无威势,心生嫉妒,便唆使一位名叫旃遮摩那吠卡的女游行外道说:“来吧,姐妹,你以不实之言去诽谤沙门乔达摩。”于是她趁世尊在四众弟子中说法时,走上前去,以不实之言诽谤。当帝释天揭破她的虚妄时,大众骂着“呸,黑耳朵女人!”把她从寺院驱逐出去;大地裂开,她直接成了无间地狱火焰的燃料,投生到无间地狱。外道们的利养与恭敬便愈加衰落了。比丘们在法堂中议论起来:“贤友们,旃遮摩那吠卡竟然如此诽谤具有广大功德的最上应供者、正自觉者,遭致了大毁灭啊!”导师到来后问道:“诸比丘,你们现在聚集在一起谈论什么?”比丘们回答:“在谈论此事。”世尊说:“诸比丘,不只是现在,过去世时,她也曾以不实之言诽谤我,并遭受了大毁灭。”随后世尊详细讲述了《大莲花本生经》,接着在说法中,以此事为因缘,开示了这部“一法已过”的经。巴利
25. Pañcame ekadhammaṃ atītassāti kā uppatti? Bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca mahālābhasakkāro uppajji, titthiyānaṃ parihāyi. Te hatalābhasakkārā nippabhā nittejā issāpakatā ciñcamāṇavikaṃ nāma paribbājikaṃ uyyojesuṃ – ‘‘ehi, tvaṃ bhagini, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ abhūtena abbhācikkhassū’’ti. Sā bhagavantaṃ catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ desentaṃ upagantvā abhūtena abbhācikkhitvā sakkenassā abhūtabhāve pakāsite mahājanena ‘‘dhī kāḷakaṇṇī’’ti vihārato nikkaḍḍhāpitā pathaviyā vivare dinne avīcijālānaṃ indhanaṃ hutvāva avīciniraye nibbatti, bhiyyosomattāya titthiyānaṃ lābhasakkāro parihāyi. Bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘āvuso, ciñcamāṇavikā evaṃ uḷāraguṇaṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ abhūtena akkositvā mahāvināsaṃ pattā’’ti. Satthā āgantvā ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘imāya nāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘na, bhikkhave, idāneva, pubbepi sā maṃ abhūtena akkositvā mahāvināsaṃ pattāyevā’’ti mahāpadumajātakampi vitthāretvā upari dhammaṃ desento imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā ‘‘ekadhammaṃ atītassā’’ti idaṃ suttaṃ desesi.
在这里,“一法”是指一种被称为“语真实”的法。“已过”是指有人越过了那条界限而站在了界限之外。那条界限是圣者们为了让人们舍弃八种非圣语、安立于八种圣语而设立的,即“应说真话,别说谎”。“人”就是指补特伽罗,也就是那个人。“没有不能做的”意思是没有什么是他做不出来的。因为一个故意说谎的人,做了某种恶业之后,当被问到“这件事是你做的吗”,他只会用谎话来搪塞:“不是我做的。”这样行事的人,什么恶业都做得出来,而且对此毫不羞愧,因为他已经越过了真实的界限。因此世尊说:“是哪一法呢?诸比丘,就是故意妄语。”巴利
Tattha ekadhammanti ekaṃ vacīsaccasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ. Atītassāti yā sā aṭṭha anariyavohāre vajjetvā aṭṭhasu ariyavohāresu patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ‘‘saccaṃ , bhaṇe, nālika’’nti ariyehi ṭhapitā mariyādā, taṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitassa. Puriso eva puggaloti purisapuggalo, tassa. Akaraṇīyanti kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sampajānamusāvādī hi puggalo kiñci pāpakammaṃ katvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma tayā kata’’nti vutte ‘‘na mayā kata’’nti musāvādeneva pariharissati. Evañca paṭipajjanto kiñci pāpakammaṃ karotiyeva, na tattha lajjati saccamariyādāya samatikkantattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘katamaṃ ekadhammaṃ, yadidaṃ, bhikkhave, sampajānamusāvādo’’ti.
偈颂里说的“妄语者”,是指习惯用虚假、不实、不正确的话去让别人误以为真的人。对那种在十句话里连一句真话都没有的人,根本没什么可跟他说的。“众生”,就是有情。有情因为会投生,所以叫“众生”。“已超越他世者”,就是已经抛弃了来世的人。像这样的人,人间的福报、天界的福报,乃至最终涅槃的福报,这三种福报他全都看不到。“没有恶”,是说对那种人来讲,根本不存在“这种恶是不该做的”这样的想法。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ musāvādissāti musā abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ paresaṃ viññāpanavasena vadanasīlassa. Yassa dasasu vacanesu ekampi saccaṃ natthi, evarūpe vattabbameva natthi. Jantunoti sattassa. Satto hi jāyanaṭṭhena ‘‘jantū’’ti vuccati. Vitiṇṇaparalokassāti vissaṭṭhaparalokassa. Īdiso hi manussasampatti devalokasampatti avasāne nibbānasampattīti imā tissopi sampattiyo na passati. Natthi pāpanti tassa tādisassa idaṃ nāma pāpaṃ na kattabbanti natthīti.
6. 布施经的注释巴利
6. Dānasuttavaṇṇanā
26 第六经中,“如果这样”:“这样”在这里是表示譬喻的虚词,“如果”表示假设。“有情”:就是在色等诸法上执着、黏着的众生。“了知”:就是觉悟。“布施与分享”:以某种思心所,把食物等应当布施的东西聚集起来,出于悲悯或供养等某一种动机而送给别人,这叫做布施;而把自己本来应当受用的东西取出一部分分给别人,这叫做分享。“异熟”:就是果报。“如同我了知”:就是如同我了知的那样。这里说的是:诸位比丘,就像我以智慧之力现前了知布施和分享的异熟、业异熟,例如“即使对畜生道众生布施,也能以在百生中感受快乐的异熟方式,使布施成为百倍的供养”等等,同样,如果这些有情也能了知。“不施与他人,不应自己受用”:凡自己所拥有、本应受用的物品,若不施予他人,就会以悭吝之心和渴爱贪欲而受用;应当布施之后才受用。并且,悭吝之垢不应占据、控制他们的心。所谓悭吝之垢,是以不忍受自己所得与他人共有为特征、能染污心之明净性的随烦恼类黑法中的一种。或者,如前所说,悭吝以及其他障碍布施的嫉妒、贪欲、嗔恨等垢染,不应如此占据、完全抓住、制伏他们的心,以致布施思不能生起,或不能变得极为清净。因为,谁若真正了知布施之果,怎会在自己心中给悭吝之垢留下余地呢?巴利
26. Chaṭṭhe evañceti ettha evanti upamākāre nipāto, ceti parikappane. Sattāti rūpādīsu sattā visattā. Jāneyyunti bujjheyyuṃ. Dānasaṃvibhāgassāti yāya hi cetanāya annādideyyadhammaṃ saṃharitvā anukampāpūjāsu aññataravasena paresaṃ dīyati, taṃ dānaṃ. Yāya pana attanā paribhuñjitabbabhāvena gahitavatthussa ekadeso saṃvibhajitvā dīyati, ayaṃ saṃvibhāgo. Vipākanti phalaṃ. Yathāhaṃ jānāmīti yathā ahaṃ jānāmi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tiracchānagatassapi dānaṃ datvā attabhāvasate pavattasukhavipaccanavasena sataguṇā dakkhiṇā hotīti evamādinā, bhikkhave, yena pakārena ahaṃ dānassa saṃvibhāgassa ca vipākaṃ kammavipākaṃ ñāṇabalena paccakkhato jānāmi, evaṃ ime sattā yadi jāneyyunti. Na adatvā bhuñjeyyunti yaṃ bhuñjitabbayuttakaṃ attano atthi, tato paresaṃ na adatvā macchariyacittena ca taṇhālobhavasena ca bhuñjeyyuṃ, datvāva bhuñjeyyuṃ. Na ca nesaṃ maccheramalaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyyāti attano sampattīnaṃ parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanalakkhaṇaṃ cittassa pabhassarabhāvadūsakānaṃ upakkilesabhūtānaṃ kaṇhadhammānaṃ aññataraṃ maccheramalaṃ. Atha vā yathāvuttamaccherañceva aññampi dānantarāyakaraṃ issālobhadosādimalañca nesaṃ sattānaṃ cittaṃ yathā dānacetanā na pavattati, na vā suparisuddhā hoti, evaṃ pariyādāya parito gahetvā abhibhavitvā na tiṭṭheyya. Ko hi sammadeva dānaphalaṃ jānanto attano citte maccheramalassa okāsaṃ dadeyya.
即使这些众生只剩下最后一口食物,也就是他们所有食物中最后的那一口,这最后一口食团就是它的另一种说法。这里说的是:这些众生平时靠若干口食物维持生命,如果他们把其中一口留给自己,把其余所有食物都送给来来往往需要的人,那么留下的那一口,在这里就叫作最后一口食。即使对那一口食物,他们也不应该不分享就自己吃掉。如果他们有接受布施的人,即使是从前面说的最后一口食物中,也应该分出一部分布施出去,然后自己才吃。就像我亲自现见布施与分享的果报那样,如果他们也能这样知道就好了。又因为“因为……”等话,是说明由于没有亲自现见业果,这些众生才不实行布施与分享,以这个理由来阐明前面所说的含义。由此也应当看出,这说明了他们为什么对其它福德不修习,反而去造作非福业的原因。巴利
Yopi nesaṃ assa carimo ālopoti nesaṃ sattānaṃ yo sabbapacchimako ālopo siyā. Carimaṃ kabaḷanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime sattā pakatiyā yattakehi ālopehi sayaṃ yāpeyyuṃ, tesu ekameva ālopaṃ attano atthāya ṭhapetvā tadaññe sabbe ālope āgatāgatānaṃ atthikānaṃ datvā yo ṭhapito ālopo assa, so idha carimo ālopo nāma. Tatopi na asaṃvibhajitvā bhuñjeyyuṃ, sace nesaṃ paṭiggāhakā assūti nesaṃ sattānaṃ paṭiggāhakā yadi siyuṃ, tatopi yathāvuttacarimālopatopi saṃvibhajitvāva ekadesaṃ datvāva bhuñjeyyuṃ, yathāhaṃ dānasaṃvibhāgassa vipākaṃ paccakkhato jānāmi, evaṃ yadi jāneyyunti. Yasmā ca khotiādinā kammaphalassa appaccakkhabhāvato evamete sattā dānasaṃvibhāgesu na pavattantīti yathādhippetamatthaṃ kāraṇena sampaṭipādeti. Eteneva tesaṃ tadaññapuññesu ca appaṭipattiyā apuññesu ca paṭipattiyā kāraṇaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“如大仙所说”:所谓“大仙”,是指世尊。世尊曾以“对畜生道众生布施,可以期待百倍的供养果报”等说法开示过;或者,就是在这部经里以“如果众生能够这样了知”等说法所讲的内容。意思是:以智慧的运作,了知了如前所说的那颗心。“分享的异熟”:连分享的果报都这样,更何况布施的果报呢?“如同成为大果报”:就像那异熟成为广大的果报一样,如果这些众生能够这样了知——前后文应当这样连接起来理解。“平息悭吝之垢”:就是去除悭吝的污垢之后,以对业果的深信和对三宝的深信,内心特别清净澄澈;对于远离烦恼的圣者,以及具足戒等功德的人,即使布施的东西很少,也会成为大果报。应当在适当的时机,向这些应受供养的人行布施。巴利
Gāthāsu yathāvuttaṃ mahesināti mahesinā bhagavatā ‘‘tiracchānagate dānaṃ datvā sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā’ tiādinā, idheva vā ‘‘evaṃ ce sattā jāneyyu’’ntiādinā yathāvuttaṃ, ñāṇacārena taṃ yathāvuttaṃ cittaṃ ñātanti attho. Vipākaṃ saṃvibhāgassāti saṃvibhāgassapi vipākaṃ, ko pana vādo dānassa. Yathā hoti mahapphalanti yathā so vipāko mahantaṃ phalaṃ hoti, evaṃ ime sattā yadi jāneyyunti sambandho. Vineyya maccheramalanti macchariyamalaṃ apanetvā kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca visesato pasannena cittena yesu kilesehi ārakattā ariyesu sīlādiguṇasampannesu dinnaṃ appakampi dānaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, tesu yuttakālena dajjuṃ dadeyyuṃ.
能成就大果报,所以值得领受供养,因此叫“应供者”,也就是正行道的人;这里说的是在这些应供者当中。“供养”是指深信他世而应当布施的施物,要让那份布施成为大布施,就这样布施出去。或者也可以说:布施了许多食物之后,那又该怎么布施食物呢?经文说“在应供者中(行)供养”。施主们从这一世的人身死后,以结生的方式投生到天界。所谓“欲乐者”,是指他们凭着已获得广大天界欲乐的形色与威势的那种业而往生受用,因为行善的缘故,成为欲乐者、一切欲乐圆满具足者。他们“喜悦”,意思是随心所欲地享受快乐。巴利
Mahapphalabhāvakaraṇato dakkhiṇaṃ arahantīti dakkhiṇeyyā, sammāpaṭipannā, tesu dakkhiṇeyyesu. Dakkhiṇaṃ paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbaṃ deyyadhammaṃ yathā taṃ dānaṃ hoti mahādānaṃ, evaṃ datvā. Atha vā bahuno annaṃ datvā, kathaṃ pana annaṃ dātabbanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇa’’nti. Ito manussattā manussattabhāvato cutā paṭisandhivasena saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā. Kāmakāminoti kāmetabbānaṃ uḷārānaṃ devabhogānaṃ paṭiladdharūpavibhavena kammunā upagamane sādhukāritāya kāmakāmino sabbakāmasamaṅgino. Modanti yathāruci paricārentīti attho.
第七部:慈心修习经的注释巴利
7. Mettābhāvanāsuttavaṇṇanā
27 第七经中,“任何这些”这一说法,是指毫无遗漏地全部涵盖。“有存依的善业处”则是对它们的界定。巴利
27. Sattame yāni kānicīti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūnīti
对它们的界定如下。这里,“所依”指的是诸蕴;戒是它们产生所依的因;或者以所依为目标和用途,所以叫“依所依的”。这些是在善趣生命中产生自体、带来结生和转起异熟的业。“福德行事处”的意思是:它们既是福德之行,又是种种果报和利益的依处,所以叫“福德行事处”。简要来说,它们分为三种:布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成。其中应当说明的内容,将在后面的三集注释中阐明。“慈心解脱”,是通过修慈而证得的三禅或四禅等至。因为只说“慈”时,近行定和安止定都包括在内;但说“心解脱”时,只指安止的禅那。因为那禅那能极好地把心从五盖等敌对法中解脱出来,所以叫“心解脱”。“不值十六分之一”:那些依所依的福德行事处,比不上慈心解脱的十六分之一。这话的意思是:把慈心解脱的异熟果报分成十六份,再从其中取一份分成十六份,那一份,其他依所依的福德行事处也比不上。“超越之后”:就是压伏、胜过之后。“照耀”:以远离随烦恼的清净而发光。“炽热”:由此彻底烧灼一切敌对法。“闪耀”:以两种成就而闪耀。因为慈心解脱名为月光,它远离随烦恼,像月光一样照耀;像日光一样驱散黑暗、破除敌对法而炽热;像药星一样闪烁而闪耀。巴利
Tesaṃ niyamanaṃ. Tattha upadhi vuccanti khandhā, upadhissa karaṇaṃ sīlaṃ etesaṃ, upadhippayojanāni vā opadhikāni. Sampattibhave attabhāvajanakāni paṭisandhipavattivipākadāyakāni. Puññakiriyavatthūnīti puññakiriyā ca tā tesaṃ tesaṃ phalānisaṃsānaṃ vatthūni cāti puññakiriyavatthūni. Tāni pana saṅkhepato dānamayaṃ, sīlamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti tividhāni honti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato tikanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Mettāya cetovimuttiyāti mettābhāvanāvasena paṭiladdhatikacatukkajjhānasamāpattiyā. ‘‘Mettā’’ti hi vutte upacāropi labbhati appanāpi, ‘‘cetovimuttī’’ti pana vutte appanājhānameva labbhati. Tañhi nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammato cittassa suṭṭhu vimuttibhāvena cetovimuttīti vuccati. Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasinti mettābrahmavihārassa soḷasabhāgaṃ opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūni na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mettāya cetovimuttiyā yo vipāko, taṃ soḷasa koṭṭhāse katvā tato ekaṃ puna soḷasa koṭṭhāse katvā tattha yo ekakoṭṭhāso, na taṃ aññāni opadhikāni puññakiriyavatthūni agghantīti. Adhiggahetvāti abhibhavitvā. Bhāsateti upakkilesavisuddhiyā dippati. Tapateti tato eva anavasese paṭipakkhadhamme santapati. Virocatīti ubhayasampattiyā virocati. Mettā hi cetovimutti candālokasaṅkhātā vigatūpakkilesā juṇhā viya dippati, ātapo viya andhakāraṃ paccanīkadhamme vidhamantī tapati, osadhitārakā viya vijjotamānā virocati ca.
“Seyyathāpi”这个词是表示譬喻意义的助词。“Tārakarūpānaṃ”指诸星光。“Candiyā”:月亮的这个叫“candī”,即“candiyā”,意思是月光、明亮。“Vassānaṃ”是因多雨而得名的季节。“Pacchime māse”指最后一个月,即迦提月。“Saradasamaye”指秋季。因为世间把阿湿婆逾阇月和迦提月称为“秋季”。“Viddhe”指高耸的,意思是因云散而变得遥远。所以接着说“vigatavalāhake”,即云已消散。“Deve”指天空中。“Nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno”指从升起之处跨越天空。“Tamagataṃ”指黑暗。“Abhivihacca”指撞击、摧毁之后。“Osadhitārakā”:丰盛的光辉由此承载,或因能给予药草助力而名为“药星”。巴利
Seyyathāpīti opammadassanatthe nipāto. Tārakarūpānanti jotīnaṃ. Candiyāti candassa ayanti candī, tassā candiyā, pabhāya juṇhāyāti attho. Vassānanti vassānaṃ bahuvasena laddhavohārassa utuno. Pacchime māseti kattikamāse. Saradasamayeti saradakāle. Assayujakattikamāsā hi loke ‘‘saradautū’’ti vuccanti. Viddheti ubbiddhe, meghavigamena dūrībhūteti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘vigatavalāhake’’ti. Deveti ākāse. Nabhaṃ abbhussakkamānoti udayaṭṭhānato ākāsaṃ ullaṅghanto. Tamagatanti tamaṃ. Abhivihaccāti abhihantvā vidhamitvā. Osadhitārakāti ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhīnaṃ vā anubalappadāyikattā osadhīti laddhanāmā tārakā.
这里有人问:既然其他福德也都具有“有所依”的性质,为什么世尊还要把慈单独提出来,和其他有所依的福德区分开来说呢?回答是:因为慈最殊胜,没有过失,而且对众生是善巧正确的行持。这些住确实是最殊胜的,是对一切众生正确的行持,也就是慈的禅那。就像梵天以没有过失的心安住一样,具备这些禅那的修行者也和梵天一样安住,所以这些住被称为“梵住”。因此,正是因为最殊胜、没有过失,以及对众生善巧正确地行持,世尊才把慈单独提出来,和其他有所依的福德区分开来说。巴利
Etthāha – kasmā pana bhagavatā samānepi opadhikabhāve mettā itarehi opadhikapuññehi visesetvā vuttāti? Vuccate – seṭṭhaṭṭhena niddosabhāvena ca sattesu suppaṭipattibhāvato. Seṭṭhā hi ete vihārā, sabbasattesu sammāpaṭipattibhūtāni yadidaṃ mettājhānāni. Yathā ca brahmāno niddosacittā viharanti, evaṃ etehi samannāgatā yogino brahmasamāva hutvā viharanti. Tathā hime ‘‘brahmavihārā’’ti vuccanti. Iti seṭṭhaṭṭhena niddosabhāvena ca sattesu suppaṭipattibhāvato mettāva itarehi opadhikapuññehi visesetvā vuttā.
那么,为什么偏偏要把慈单独提出来特别说明呢?因为慈是其他梵住的基础,也是布施等一切善法得以圆满的原因。慈的特相是对众生生起希望他们得到利益的态度,作用是带来利益,现起是消除瞋恨。如果以没有界限的方式修习慈、反复修习它,那么悲等其他梵住的修习就能轻松成就,所以慈是其他梵住的基础。同样,当对众生生起利益之心时,就自然难以忍受他们的痛苦,希望他们获得最好的成就并长久保持,而且因为没有偏袒,心能平等地对待一切,这些都容易成就。正是这样,那些致力于为整个世间带来利益与安乐的大菩萨们,不会去做“这个该给,那个不该给”这种最高程度的分别拣择,而是把布施——一切安乐的根源——平等地施予所有众生;他们为了众生的利益安乐而持戒;为了圆满戒行而修出离;为了在众生的利益安乐上不迷惑而净化智慧;为了增长众生的利益安乐而发起坚固的精进;即使凭借最高的精进达到了大丈夫的气概,也仍然因为对众生怀着利益之心而宽恕他们的种种过错;他们说过“我们会给你们这个,我们会为你们做那个”之类的话,绝不食言;他们为了众生的利益安乐,成为不可动摇的依靠。他们对众生以不可动摇的慈心先行付出,纯粹出于利益之心,即使众生伤害他们,也保持平等心,而且不会因为自己先付出了就期待回报。就这样,他们圆满诸波罗蜜,直到十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共佛法等种种分类中的一切善法都圆满。以上就是“慈是布施等一切善法的圆满者”这一殊胜之处的说明,因此才把慈与其他梵住区分开来特别宣说。巴利
Evampi kasmā mettāva evaṃ visesetvā vuttā? Itaresaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato dānādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ paripūrikattā ca. Ayañhi sattesu hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā mettā, hitūpasaṃhārasā, āghātavinayapaccupaṭṭhānā. Yadi anodhiso bhāvitā bahulīkatā, atha sukheneva karuṇādibhāvanā sampajjantīti mettā itaresaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi sattesu hitajjhāsayatāya sati nesaṃ dukkhāsahanatā, sampattivisesānaṃ ciraṭṭhitikāmatā, pakkhapātābhāvena sabbattha samappavattacittatā ca sukheneva ijjhanti. Evañca sakalalokahitasukhavidhānādhimuttā mahābodhisattā ‘‘imassa dātabbaṃ, imassa na dātabba’’nti uttamavicayavasena vibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbasattānaṃ niravasesasukhanidānaṃ dānaṃ denti, hitasukhatthameva nesaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, sīlaparipūraṇatthaṃ nekkhammaṃ bhajanti, tesaṃ hitasukhesu asammohatthāya paññaṃ pariyodapenti, hitasukhābhivaḍḍhanatthameva daḷhaṃ vīriyamārabhanti, uttamavīriyavasena vīrabhāvaṃ pattāpi sattānaṃ nānappakāraṃ hitajjhāsayeneva aparādhaṃ khamanti, ‘‘idaṃ vo dassāma, karissāmā’’tiādinā kataṃ paṭiññātaṃ na visaṃvādenti, tesaṃ hitasukhāyeva acalādhiṭṭhānā honti. Tesu acalāya mettāya pubbakārino hitajjhāsayeneva nesaṃ vippakāre udāsīnā honti, pubbakāritāyapi na paccupakāramāsisantīti. Evaṃ te pāramiyo pūretvā yāva dasabalacatu-vesārajja-chaasādhāraṇañāṇa-aṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammappabhede sabbepi kalyāṇadhamme paripūrenti. Evaṃ dānādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ pāripūrikā mettāti ca imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ sā itarehi visesetvā vuttā.
另外,慈心相比其他有依着的福德,具有更大的威力,这一点应该通过《韦拉摩经》来说明。在那部经里,就像说:比起韦拉摩婆罗门的大布施,供养一位入流者的布施果报更大;同样,比起供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者的布施果报更大……比起供养一百位独觉佛,供养世尊的布施果报更大;比起那个,供养以佛陀为首的僧团的布施果报更大;比起那个,为四方僧团布施精舍的果报更大;比起那个,皈依三宝的果报更大;比起那个,受持戒律的果报更大;比起那个,仅仅在挤一次牛奶那么短的时间里修习慈心,果报更大。正如经中所说:巴利
Apica mettāya itarehi opadhikapuññehi mahānubhāvatā velāmasuttena dīpetabbā. Tattha hi yathā nāma mahatā velāmassa dānato ekassa sotāpannassa dānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ sotāpannasatato ekassa sakadāgāmissa dānaṃ…pe… paccekabuddhasatato bhagavato, tatopi buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dānaṃ, tatopi cātuddisassa saṅghassa vihāradānaṃ, tatopi saraṇagamanaṃ, tatopi sīlasamādānaṃ, tatopi gaddūhanamattaṃ kālaṃ mettābhāvanā mahapphalatarā vuttā. Yathāha –
居士,韦拉摩婆罗门曾经做过一场大布施。如果供养一位具足正见的人,果报比那更大。如果供养一百位具足正见的人……乃至远离酒类等放逸处。如果哪怕只是在挤一次牛奶那么短的时间里修习慈心,果报也比那更大。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ gahapati velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ. Yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalataraṃ. Yo ca sataṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya…pe… surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiṃ. Yo ca antamaso gaddūhanamattampi mettacittaṃ bhāveyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’nti (a. ni. 9.20).
不过,由于它是广大福德,比起小福德来自然更为殊胜,这根本不必多说。经中确实这样说过:“凡是以有限量造作的业,它不会停留在那里,不会在那里站住。”因为欲界业就叫做“有限量所作”,而广大业则超越了限量,是以有界限和无界限遍满的方式增长造作起来的,所以叫做“无量所作”。欲界业没办法黏附在广大业中间,也没办法压过广大业、抢到让自身果报成熟的机会而站住;相反,是广大业像大水淹没小水一样压过那小业,占住自己的位置,挡住小业的果报,自己把有情引导到梵天世界去——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Mahaggatapuññabhāvena panassā parittapuññato sātisayatāya vattabbameva natthi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ, na taṃ tatrāvasissati, na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; saṃ. ni. 4.360). Kāmāvacarakammañhi pamāṇakataṃ nāma, mahaggatakammaṃ pana pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā odhisakānodhisakapharaṇavasena vaḍḍhitvā katattā appamāṇakataṃ nāma. Kāmāvacarakammaṃ tassa mahaggatakammassa antarā laggituṃ vā taṃ kammaṃ abhibhavitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ gahetvā ṭhātuṃ vā na sakkoti, atha kho mahaggatakammameva taṃ parittakammaṃ mahogho viya parittaṃ udakaṃ abhibhavitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā sayameva brahmasahabyataṃ upanetīti ayañhi tassa atthoti.
偈颂中“凡”字,指的是任何在家人或出家人。“慈”指慈心禅那。“无量”指从修习和所缘两方面都是无量。因为它不像不净修习等那样只取所缘的一部分,而是以无余遍满、无界限遍满的方式,成为无量所缘,又因修习纯熟而成为无量。以慈心禅那为近因修观之后,证得下分圣道的人,瞋恚结等被断除,它们就变得薄弱。因此说“passato upadhikkhayaṃ”(见依著灭尽)。所谓“依著灭尽”指的就是涅槃(“upadhikkhayo”指涅槃)。他以作证现观的证悟方式,以道智见涅槃。或者,“它们就变得薄弱”是指:以慈心禅那为近因的观,依次证得称为依著灭尽的阿罗汉果后,见彼时,十种结早就变得薄弱、被断除了,这是意思。或者,“它们就变得薄弱”是指瞋恚以及瞋恚相应结变得薄弱。“见依著灭尽”是指以证得慈心而见彼等烦恼依著的灭尽,这里应当如此理解其义。巴利
Gāthāsu yoti yo koci gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā. Mettanti mettājhānaṃ. Appamāṇanti bhāvanāvasena ārammaṇavasena ca appamāṇaṃ. Asubhabhāvanādayo viya hi ārammaṇe ekadesaggahaṇaṃ akatvā anavasesapharaṇavasena anodhisopharaṇavasena ca appamāṇārammaṇatāya paguṇabhāvanāvasena appamāṇaṃ. Tanū saṃyojanā hontīti mettājhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā sammasitvā heṭṭhime ariyamagge adhigacchantassa sukheneva paṭighasaṃyojanādayo pahīyamānā tanū honti. Tenāha ‘‘passato upadhikkhaya’’nti. ‘‘Upadhikkhayo’’ti hi nibbānaṃ vuccati. Tañcassa sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena maggañāṇena passati. Atha vā tanū saṃyojanā hontīti mettājhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya anukkamena upadhikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ patvā taṃ passato pageva dasapi saṃyojanā tanū honti, pahīyantīti attho. Atha vā tanū saṃyojanā hontīti paṭigho ceva paṭighasampayuttasaṃyojanā ca tanukā honti. Passato upadhikkhayanti tesaṃyeva kilesūpadhīnaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ mettaṃ adhigamavasena passanta ssāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
像这样,开示了慈心修习达到顶点能断除烦恼和证得涅槃的功德之后,现在为了显示其他功德,说了“ekampi ce”等话。其中,“心不被染污”是指由于慈心的力量,嗔恨已被很好地镇伏,所以心没有被嗔恨染污。“修慈”是指以遍满利益的方式修习慈心。“善者”是指极其善巧、具有大福德的人,或者因为去除了嗔恚等无意义的东西而成为善者。“由此而安稳”是指由于那慈心修习而安稳。“一切众生”中的“ca”表示区别。“以心悲悯”是指以心意悲悯。这里说的是:即使只对一位有情修慈,就已经是大善聚了。然而,以心将一切众生视如自己的爱子,以遍满利益的方式悲悯,那么这位具有清净心的圣洁者,就造作、产生了能让自己的果报相续流布六十四大劫的众多、广大、无量、无边的殊胜福德。巴利
Evaṃ kilesappahānaṃ nibbānādhigamañca mettābhāvanāya sikhāppattamānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni aññe ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘ekampi ce’’tiādimāha. Tattha aduṭṭhacittoti mettābalena suṭṭhu vikkhambhitabyāpādatāya byāpādena adūsitacitto. Mettāyatīti hitapharaṇavasena mettaṃ karoti. Kusaloti atisayena kusalavā mahāpuñño, paṭighādianatthavigamena vo. Khemī tenāti tena mettāyitena. Sabbe ca pāṇeti casaddo byatireke. Manasānukampanti cittena anukampanto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ekasattavisayāpi tāva mettā mahākusalarāsi, sabbe pana pāṇe attano piyaputtaṃ viya hitapharaṇena manasā anukampanto pahūtaṃ bahuṃ anappakaṃ apariyantaṃ catusaṭṭhimahākappepi attano vipākappabandhaṃ pavattetuṃ samatthaṃ uḷārapuññaṃ ariyo parisuddhacitto puggalo pakaroti nipphādeti.
“sattasaṇḍaṃ”是指具备被称为“有情稠林”的稠密,即充满有情、人烟密集而不稀疏,意思就是这样。“vijitvā”是指不用杖、不用刀,唯以正法征服之后。“rājisayo”是指像仙人一样的诸位法王。“yajamānā”是指正在行布施的。“anupariyagā”是指到处游行。巴利
Sattasaṇḍanti sattasaṅkhātena saṇḍena samannāgataṃ bharitaṃ, sattehi aviraḷaṃ ākiṇṇamanussanti attho. Vijitvāti adaṇḍena asatthena dhammeneva vijinitvā. Rājisayoti isisadisā dhammikarājāno. Yajamānāti dānāni dadamānā. Anupariyagāti vicariṃsu.
在“马祭”等词中,据说在古时候国王的时代,有四种摄受人的方法:谷祭、人祭、善结、爱语。国王们用这四种方法来摄受世间。其中,谷祭是指从收成的谷物中抽取十分之一,意思是在谷物丰收方面有智慧。人祭是指给大勇士们提供六个月的粮食和薪俸,意思是在摄受勇士方面有智慧。善结是指让贫穷的人写下借据,三年内借给他们一千、两千等数量的钱财而不收利息。因为它恰当地把人系结起来,就像绑在心上一样,所以称为“善结”。爱语是指用“孩子啊、伯父啊”这样柔和的话语来摄受,意思是说可爱的话、亲切的话。这样以四种摄受法所摄受的国家,就会富庶、繁荣、饮食丰足、安稳无诤。人们快乐欢喜,把孩子抱在怀里逗弄,家门敞开而住。因为家门口没有门闩,所以称为“无闩”。这是古代的传承,这是古代的传统。巴利
Assamedhantiādīsu porāṇakarājakāle kira sassamedhaṃ, purisamedhaṃ, sammāpāsaṃ, vācāpeyyanti cattāri saṅgahavatthūni ahesuṃ, yehi rājāno lokaṃ saṅgaṇhiṃsu. Tattha nipphannasassato dasamabhāgaggahaṇaṃ sassamedhaṃ nāma, sassasampādane, medhāvitāti attho. Mahāyodhānaṃ chamāsikaṃ bhattavetanānuppadānaṃ purisamedhaṃ nāma, purisasaṅgaṇhane medhāvitāti attho. Daliddamanussānaṃ potthake lekhaṃ gahetvā tīṇi vassāni vinā vaḍḍhiyā sahassadvisahassamattadhanānuppadānaṃ sammāpāsaṃ nāma. Tañhi sammā manusse pāseti hadaye bandhitvā viya ṭhapeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāpāsa’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Tāta mātulā’’tiādinā pana saṇhavācāya saṅgahaṇaṃ vācāpeyyaṃ nāma, peyyavajjaṃ piyavācatāti attho. Evaṃ catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi saṅgahitaṃ raṭṭhaṃ iddhañceva hoti phītañca pahūtaannapānaṃ khemaṃ nirabbudaṃ. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā viharanti . Idaṃ gharadvāresu aggaḷānaṃ abhāvato ‘‘niraggaḷa’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ porāṇikā paveṇi, ayaṃ porāṇikā pakati.
后来,到了甘蔗王时代,婆罗门把这四种摄受法和国家的繁荣完全颠倒了,把根本都翻转过来,创立了所谓的马祭、人祭等五种祭祀。世尊在《婆罗门法经》中就是这样说的:巴利
Aparabhāge pana okkākarājakāle brāhmaṇā imāni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni imañca raṭṭhasampattiṃ parivattentā uddhammūlaṃ katvā assamedhaṃ purisamedhantiādike pañca yaññe nāma akaṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā brāhmaṇadhammiyasutte –
他们产生了颠倒之见,把微细的看成微细之后……
他们在那里把咒语送到,然后就去到甘蔗王那里。巴利
‘‘Tesaṃ āsi vipallāso, disvāna aṇuto aṇuṃ…pe…. ‘‘Te tattha mante ganthetvā, okkākaṃ tadupāgamu’’nti. (su. ni. 301-304);
在这里,他们杀害、压迫马,所以叫“马祭”。这是指这样一种祭祀:要用两种辅助祭祀来举行,设二十一祭柱,仅在最后一天就恐怖地屠杀五百九十七头牲畜,除了土地和男子以外,其余一切财物都作为布施。这是那种祭祀的名称。
在这里,他们杀害、压迫男子,所以叫“人祭”。这是指要用四种辅助祭祀来举行,连同土地在内,财物布施如前面马祭所说的那样。这是那种祭祀的名称。
在这里,他们投掷“萨玛”投棒,所以叫“萨玛帕萨”。这是指这样一种祭祀:把名为“穿轭孔”的投棒投出去,在它落下的地方筑坛,用可移动的祭柱等,从萨罗沙提河沉没之处开始,逆流而上举行。这是那种名为“萨多亚伽”的祭祀的名称。
在这里,他们饮用“瓦佳”,所以叫“瓦佳贝亚”。这是指要用一种辅助祭祀、用十七头牲畜来举行,设贝勒树祭柱,布施十七种物品。这是那种祭祀的名称。
这里没有门闩,所以叫“无门闩者”。这是指要用九种辅助祭祀来举行,连同土地和男子在内,财物布施如前面马祭所说的那样,名为“一切祭”的祭祀,也就是马祭的变体。这是那种祭祀的名称。巴利
Tattha assamettha medhanti bādhentīti assamedho. Dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ekasmiṃ pacchimadivase eva sattanavutipañcapasusataghātabhīsanassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhanti bādhentīti purisamedho. Catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃbhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsanti khipantīti sammāpāso. Yugacchiggaḷe pavesanadaṇḍakasaṅkhātaṃ sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatinadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa satrayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ vājamettha pivantīti vājapeyyo. Ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beḷuvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷoti niraggaḷo. Navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
“Candappabhā”就是指月光。“Tāragaṇā va sabbe”是说:就像所有星宿加在一起,也比不上月亮光辉的十六分之一;同样,那些马祭等祭祀,比起以所说特征善修慈心的人,连十六分之一都达不到,赶不上,也比不上——这就是意思。巴利
Candappabhāti candappabhāya. Tāragaṇāva sabbeti yathā sabbepi tārāgaṇā candimasobhāya soḷasimpi kalaṃ nāgghanti, evaṃ te assamedhādayo yaññā mettacittassa vuttalakkhaṇena subhāvitassa soḷasimpi kalaṃ nānubhavanti, na pāpuṇanti, nāgghantīti attho.
现在,为了进一步说明慈心修习在现世和来世的功德利益,接着说了“yo na hantī”等话。其中,“yo”指的是致力于修习慈心这种梵住的修行者。“na hantī”是说,由于慈心修习的力量,嗔恨已被远远压制住,所以他不杀害任何众生,也不用土块、棍棒等去伤害众生。“na ghātetī”是说,他不教唆别人去杀害众生,也不教唆别人去伤害众生。“na jinātī”是说,他不以愤怒争吵等方式去胜过任何人,因为愤怒本身就不存在;或者,他不以造成损失、诉讼等方式去胜过任何人。“na jāpayeti”是说,他也不指使别人去造成他人的财产损失。“mettaṃso”是指以慈心所成的那一分心,或者说,因为不舍弃慈心而成为慈心的一部分,所以叫慈心分。“sabbabhūtesu”是指对一切众生。正因为如此,“tato eva veraṃ tassa na kenaci”是说,不善的怨敌不会以任何理由存在于他那里;对这位安住于慈心的修行者来说,称为人际怨仇的对立,与任何人之间都不存在。巴利
Idāni aparepi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyike mettābhāvanāya ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘yo na hantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yoti mettābrahmavihārabhāvanānuyutto puggalo. Na hantīti teneva mettābhāvanānubhāvena dūravikkhambhitabyāpādatāya na kañci sattaṃ hiṃsati, leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi na vibādhati vā. Na ghātetīti paraṃ samādapetvā na satte hanāpeti na vibādhāpeti ca. Na jinātīti sārambhaviggāhikakathādivasena na kañci jināti sārambhasseva abhāvato, jānikaraṇavasena vā aḍḍakaraṇādinā na kañci jināti. Na jāpayeti parepi payojetvā paresaṃ dhanajāniṃ na kārāpeyya. Mettaṃsoti mettāmayacittakoṭṭhāso, mettāya vā aṃso avijahanaṭṭhena avayavabhūtoti mettaṃso. Sabbabhūtesūti sabbasattesu. Tato eva veraṃ tassa na kenacīti akusalaveraṃ tassa kenacipi kāraṇena natthi, puggalaverasaṅkhāto virodho kenaci purisena saddhiṃ tassa mettāvihārissa natthīti.
这样,在这一集里,按顺序在十三部经以及两部学经——也就是十五部经中,讲说了还灭;在《盖经》《结经》《不放逸经》《骨聚经》这四部经中,讲说了流转与还灭;而在其余诸经中,则只讲说了流转。巴利
Evametasmiṃ ekakanipāte paṭipāṭiyā terasasu suttesu sikkhāsuttadvaye cāti pannarasasu suttesu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ, nīvaraṇasuttaṃ saṃyojanasuttaṃ appamādasuttaṃ aṭṭhisañcayasuttanti etesu catūsu suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Itaresu pana vaṭṭameva kathitanti.